Tisoft 2 Manual
Tisoft 2 Manual
Tisoft 2 Manual
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Event
Date
Description
Original Issue
Second Edition
Update Package
02/90
05/91
04/92
Third Edition
Fourth Edition
Fifth Edition
Sixth Edition
Seventh Edition
04/92
06/93
03/95
03/96
04/98
Description
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Seventh Edition
Pages
Description
Contents
Preface
Chapter 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1-2
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded Memory in DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded Memory in Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-9
Starting TISOFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-12
Chapter 2
2.1
2.2
2-2
Configuring Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing Color Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting TISOFT Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning Color Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-6
2-6
2-6
Contents
iii
Selecting a Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting a Floppy Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a New Program Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Program File Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2.3
2-10
2.4
2-11
2.5
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
Chapter 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
iv
TISOFT Basics
TISOFT Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-2
3-2
TISOFT Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
TISOFT Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
On-Line/Off-Line Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Line/Off-Line Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Line Only Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Line Only Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
TISOFT Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-10
Accessing Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Key Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Element Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Element List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-11
Contents
Chapter 4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-8
Chapter 5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5-2
5-2
5-4
5-6
Configuring I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-14
5-14
Contents
Chapter 6
6.1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Getting Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-3
6.2
6-4
6.3
6-6
Using Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning or Modifying I/O Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-15
6-15
6-17
6-19
6-19
6-19
6-20
6-20
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
Chapter 7
7.1
7.2
7.3
vi
Ladder Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
Displaying Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
Displaying Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Line Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
7-6
7-6
Contents
7.4
7-8
7-8
7-9
7-9
7-10
7-10
7-10
7-10
7.5
7-11
7.6
7-12
7-12
7-12
7-12
7.7
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-15
7-15
7.8
7-16
7.9
7-17
7-17
7-17
7-17
7.10
7-18
7-18
7-18
7.11
7-19
7-19
7-19
7-19
7-20
7-20
7.12
7-21
7-21
7-21
7-21
7-21
7-22
7-22
7-23
7-23
Contents
vii
7.13
7-24
7-24
7-24
7-24
7.14
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-25
7.15
7-26
Chapter 8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
viii
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-3
Directory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-memory Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locating Directory Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-5
Displaying Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
8-6
8-6
Editing Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8
Showing Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Entries to the Loop Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status of Control Blocks during Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-9
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-11
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
8-13
Contents
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
8.14
8.15
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-15
8-15
8-16
Program Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SF Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-16
8-16
8-20
8-20
8-20
8-21
8-21
Editing SF Programs/Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-22
8-22
8-22
8-23
8-23
8-24
8-24
8-25
8-26
8-26
8-26
8-26
8-27
8-27
8-28
8-28
8-28
8-29
8-30
Determining Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling/Disabling Control Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-30
8-30
Compiling SF Programs/Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-31
8-31
8-31
8-32
Contents
ix
Chapter 9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
Documenting Programs
9-2
Available Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using External Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing Documentation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-4
Selecting an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Comment Field to Select an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Pop-up List to Select an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comment Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking the Comment Editor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-6
Entering Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-7
Keying in Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Paging Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding a Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering and Rebuilding Comment Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-7
9-7
9-7
9-8
9-8
9-8
9-9
Selecting an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Synonym Field to Select an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Pop-up List to Select an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synonym Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking the Synonym Editor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling the Pop-up Synonym Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-9
9-9
9-10
9-10
9-11
9-11
9-12
Keying in Synonyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding a Synonym . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a Synonym . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering and Rebuilding Synonym Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-12
9-13
9-13
9-13
Titling Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-14
9-14
9-15
9-15
9-15
9-15
9-16
9-16
9-16
9-17
9-17
Contents
9.8
9-18
Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Field Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Quotes Around Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the End-of-Record Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import/Export Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comment Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synonym Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rules for Importing Synonyms and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting Synonyms and Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-18
9-19
9-19
9-19
9-20
9-21
9-21
9-22
9-22
Chapter 10
10.1
10-2
10.2
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-6
10-6
10-6
10-7
10-7
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-9
10-9
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
Contents
xi
10.10
10.11
10-14
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
10-15
10.12
10.13
10.14
10.15
Chapter 11
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
xii
11-2
11-2
11-3
11-5
11-5
11-6
11-6
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-8
11-8
11-8
Contents
11.5
11.6
11-9
11-9
11-9
11.7
Performing Controller Diagnostics (AUX 15, 20, 23, 27, 28, 29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Show Software Part Number (AUX 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run Controller Diagnostics (AUX 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show RBC Software Part Number(s) (AUX 23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show PLC Card Failure Class (AUX 27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Memory Availability (AUX 28) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show PLC Operational Status (AUX 29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.8
11.9
11-13
11-13
11-14
11-15
11-16
11-16
11-17
11-17
11-18
11-18
11.10
11.11
11-21
11-22
11-22
11-22
11.12
11.13
11.14
11-25
11-25
11-26
11-27
Contents
xiii
11.15
11.16
11-29
11-29
11-29
11-30
11-30
11.17
Chapter 12
12.1
12.2
12.3
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-3
12-3
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-5
12-5
Building a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-6
Building a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Building a Table from a Read Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Building a Free-Form Entry Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-6
12-6
12-7
Chapter 13
13.1
13.2
13.3
xiv
13-2
13-2
13-3
Block Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-3
13-3
13-3
13-3
13-4
13-4
13-4
Contents
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13-5
Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-5
13-5
13-6
Block Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Memory Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-6
13-6
13-6
13-6
13-6
13-7
13-7
13-7
13-8
Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-8
13-8
Chapter 14
Printing
14.1
14-2
14.2
14-3
14.3
14-4
14-4
14-4
14-5
14-5
14-6
14-6
14-6
14.5
14-7
14.6
14-8
Cross-Reference Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross-Reference Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking Print Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing Cross-Reference Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Print Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Executing the Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-8
14-8
14-8
14-9
14-9
14-9
14.4
Contents
xv
Appendix A
Menu Maps
Appendix B
TISOFT Messages
Appendix C
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion Procedure for Releases Earlier than 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion Procedure for Release 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix D
E.1
C-1
C-2
C-3
Appendix E
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-4
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-9
A-10
A-10
A-11
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-13
A-14
A-15
D-1
D-2
E-2
E-2
E-2
E-3
E.2
E-4
E.3
E-5
E.4
Select Secondary with UNILINK Host Adapter or TIWAY Host Adapter Card . . . . . . . . . .
E-6
E.5
E-7
xvi
Contents
Appendix F
Appendix G
F-1
F-1
F-2
F-2
G.1
G-2
G.2
G-3
G-4
G-4
G-4
G-4
G-4
G-5
G-5
G-6
G-7
G-8
G-8
G-12
G-16
G-16
G-18
G-20
G-20
G-21
G-22
G.3
Appendix H
H.1
H.2
H.3
Using Password
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-2
H-2
H-2
H-3
H-3
H-4
H-4
H-5
H-6
H-6
H-9
Contents
xvii
Appendix I
I.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-2
I.2
I-3
I-3
I-3
I-4
I-5
I-5
I-5
I-6
I-6
I-6
I-7
I-7
I-8
I-9
I-9
I-10
I.3
I.4
Appendix J
J.1
J-2
J.2
J-3
J-3
J-3
J-3
J-4
J-4
J-4
J-4
J-4
J-5
J-5
J-5
J-5
J-6
J-6
J-6
J-6
J-7
J-8
J.3
J.4
J.5
xviii
Contents
Appendix K
K.1
K-2
K.2
K-4
Contents
xix
List of Figures
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-11
1-12
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-2
2-5
2-5
2-9
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-10
3-11
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-6
4-7
4-8
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-12
5-13
5-14
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-9
xx
Contents
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-8
7-9
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-14
7-15
7-15
7-17
7-19
7-20
7-23
7-24
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-7
8-10
Contents
xxi
8-12
8-20
8-22
8-27
8-31
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
Documentation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comment Prompt Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comment Pop-up Element List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comment Editor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Recover Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synonym Prompt Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synonym Pop-up Element List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synonym Editor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pop-up Synonym Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Recover Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documentation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Title Editor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Memory Comment Editor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set-up Prompt Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synonym Prompt Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-14
9-16
9-18
9-20
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-3
10-4
10-7
10-9
10-10
10-10
10-13
10-14
10-21
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
11-10
11-11
11-3
11-11
11-13
11-14
11-15
11-16
11-16
11-17
11-19
11-21
11-23
xxii
Contents
11-12
11-13
11-14
1-15
11-24
11-24
11-31
11-32
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-2
12-4
12-5
13-1
13-2
13-4
13-7
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-3
14-4
14-4
14-6
14-7
14-8
D-1
D-2
D-1
D-2
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-4
E-5
E-6
G-1
G-2
G-3
G-4
G-5
G-6
G-7
G-8
G-9
G-10
G-2
G-3
G-5
G-9
G-12
G-16
G-17
G-17
G-20
G-21
H-1
H-2
H-4
H-5
I-1
I-2
I-3
I-4
I-5
I-8
J-1
J-2
J-5
J-7
K-1
K-4
Contents
xxiii
List of Tables
1-1
1-2
3-1
TISOFT Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
6-1
6-2
6-5
6-14
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-7
7-20
7-26
8-1
8-2
8-4
8-23
9-1
9-2
Comment Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synonym Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-21
9-21
10-1
11-1
Auxiliary Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4
13-1
13-2
F-1
F-1
G-1
H-1
H-2
H-3
H-8
H-9
H-9
I-1
I-2
I-3
I-10
J-1
J-8
K-1
K-2
K-3
K-2
K-3
K-3
22
xxiv
Contents
Preface
TISOFT 6.3
Programming
Package
Converting
Programs from
Earlier Releases
Terms in this
Manual
Controllers
Supported
TISOFT2 Release 6.3 can be used with any Series 505 or Series 500
programmable logic controller. Controllers supported by TISOFT include the
following:
SIMATIC 555
SIMATIC 575
Preface
xxv
Programming over
PROFIBUS-FMS
Network
PowerMath Support
TISOFT now supports PowerMath on SIMATIC 555 and 575 CPUs that
are equipped with this feature. PowerMath provides new floating-point
math functions and compiled Special Function execution.
Compiled SF execution translates the SF program or subroutine to the
native instruction set of the CPUs microprocessor. The compiled code is
then executed on the 68882 floating-point math coprocessor whenever the
SF program or subroutine is scheduled for execution, making execution
several times faster. PowerMath includes the following features:
Refer to the Release Notes for SIMATIC 5752105 and 5752106, Firmware
Rel. 5.0 (28072660001) for a full description of PowerMath.
xxvi
Preface
Additional Features
and Enhancements
of TISOFT
Release 6.3
Features from
Releases after 6.0
TISOFT now supports 115.2 and 57.6 K baud rates on the serial ports
of SIMATIC 555 and 575 CPUs equipped with these baud rates.
The SFSUB box parameter string length limit has increased from 20 to
40 characters.
The startup screen now offers a function, , that lists useful
key combinations for TISOFT operations.
Bit-of-word has been added to the Find operation in relay ladder logic.
CNTL
+ F as well as from
Preface
xxvii
Functionality Not
Supported by
TISOFT
xxviii
Preface
The SF DCP format has been changed to correspond to the format that
is used elsewhere in ladders (from DxxxxSyy to DCPxxxx.yy).
The speed of Aux loads to the controller for L-memory, V-memory, and
K-memory types has been increased when large amounts of space or
variables are unused.
When you change your password, TISOFT prompts you to supply the
current password, even if you have already used the password to log on.
TISOFT now forces the H1TC and TCTCP drivers to reread the list of
network names every time TISOFT goes online. This ensures that
TISOFT always has the most up-to-date list. TISOFT no longer uses
network names from the command line of the driver.
The following functions which are available in certain controller models are
not supported by this release of TISOFT:
Safety Considerations
Overview
Failure of the
Control System
The Series 500 and Series 505 controllers are highly reliable systems.
However, you must be aware that these systems can fail. If a failure occurs,
and if the control system is able to respond to the failure, the controller
enters the Fatal Error mode. The Fatal Error mode sets all the discrete
outputs to zero (off) and freezes all the word outputs at their values when
the failure was detected. Your control system design must take the Fatal
Error mode into consideration and ensure that the controller environment
can react safely if a Fatal Error occurs.
WARNING
It is possible that the system could fail without being able to execute the Fatal
Error actions. It is also possible for the system to continue to operate while
producing incorrect results.
Operating and producing incorrect results could cause unpredictable controller
behavior that could result in death or serious injury to personnel, and/or
damage to equipment.
You must provide for manual overrides in those cases where operator safety
could be jeopardized or where equipment damage is possible because of a
failure. Refer to the Safety Guidelines section in the SIMATIC 545/555/575
System Manual or other hardware system manual.
NOTE: Some user program errors can also cause the controller to enter the
Fatal Error mode. Examples include corruption of SF instruction control
blocks retained in V-memory (all systems supporting SF programming).
Preface
xxix
You must ensure the correctness of your control program before you
introduce it to the controlled process. An incorrect control program can
cause the process to act incorrectly or inconsistently. Although any number
of programming errors can cause control problems, one of the more subtle
problems occurs with the incorrect assignment of instruction numbers for
box instructions that have retained state information. The timer, counter,
and drum instructions are examples of these instructions. The chapter
about Controller Memory in the SIMATIC 545/555/575 Programming
Reference Manual (PPX:5058204x) lists the various memory areas in the
controller where retained state information is maintained; it also lists the
restrictions that exist in assigning instruction numbers for the boxes that
reference these areas. You must design your program to accommodate these
requirements.
WARNING
Editing an Active
Process
WARNING
xxx
Preface
Additional Information
Software
Compatibility
TISOFT is a DOS program and runs best in a DOS operating system. You
may experience problems communicating with the controller when you are
running TISOFT in a Windows 95 environment. If this happens, restart
your computer in MS-DOS mode for all on-line TISOFT operations.
Related Manuals
Technical
Assistance
For technical assistance, contact your Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.,
distributor or sales office. If you need assistance in contacting your
distributor or sales office in the United States, call 800-964-4114.
For additional technical assistance, call the Siemens Technical Services
Group in Johnson City, Tennessee at 423-461-2522, or contact them by
e-mail at simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com. For technical assistance
outside the United States, call 49-911-895-7000.
You can also find information about Siemens automation products at our
website at http://www.aut.sea.siemens.com.
Preface
xxxi
Chapter 1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1-2
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded Memory in DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded Memory in Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-9
Starting TISOFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-12
1-1
1.1
Hardware
Requirements
TISOFT 6.3 runs on any IBM-compatible PC, with MS-DOS 6.0 or higher
and a 386 or higher. The PC must have a 3.5-inch floppy disk drive and an
RS-232 serial communications port, and meet the system requirements
specified in Table 1-1.
Memory
Requirements
Windows
Total RAM
Conv. RAM
Disk Space
Not needed
2 Mbytes
520 Kbytes
2.5 Mbytes
8 MBytes
Not needed
25 Kbytes
3.1 or Win95
8 Mbytes
560 Kbytes
10 Mbytes
Kbytes1
5 Mbytes
3.1
3.1
3.11
40
22 Kbytes
8 Mbytes
32
Kbytes1
DOS or
5 Mbytes
Not needed
DOS or 3.1
1 Mbytes
64 Kbytes1
5 Mbytes
Windows 95
8 Mbytes
3.5 Mbytes
1Requirements
2The
1-2
Expanded Memory
in DOS
TISOFT requires the use of expanded memory when large programs are
used off-line. Follow these steps to check your computer memory:
1.
2.
3.
Expanded Memory
in Windows 95
TISOFT requires the use of expanded memory when large programs are
used off-line. After installing TISOFT as described in section 1.4, use the
following procedure to determine if your PC has expanded memory. (If
necessary, refer to pages 1-8 and 1-9 for the procedures on creating a
shortcut icon for TISOFT and accessing the Properties dialog.)
1.
2.
With the mouse cursor on the selected TISOFT icon, click the right
mouse button to access the pop-up menu, and select Properties as
shown in Figure 1-7. A TISOFT Properties dialog appears.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1-3
1.2
Cable Requirements
Controller
BRAID
FOIL
SHIELD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
2 Transmit (TD)
3 Receive (RD)
4 RTS
5 CTS
6 DSR
7 Signal Ground
8 DCD
20 DTR
Drainwire
Drainwire
Copperfoil
Shield
Connector Shell
P1
25-Pin, D-Type
Copperfoil
Shield
Connector Shell
P2
25-Pin, D-Type Male
FOIL
BRAID
SHIELD
2 Receive (RD)
3 Transmit (TD)
5 Signal Ground
1
2
3
BRAID
FOIL
SHIELD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
4
5
6
7
8
9
2 Transmit (TD)
3 Receive (RD)
4 RTS
5 CTS
6 DSR
7 Signal Ground
8 DCD
20 DTR
Drainwire
Drainwire
Copperfoil
Shield
Copperfoil
Shield
Connector Shell
P1
9-Pin, D-Type
Connector Shell
P2
25-Pin, D-Type Male
1-4
Programming Device
Controller
DCD
DSR
RX DATA
RTS
1
6
2
7
TX DATA
CTS
DTR
3
8
4
6
7
3
8
4
9
SIGNAL GND
9-Pin D-Type
Female Connector
9-Pin D-Type
Female Connector
If your controller has an RS-422 port, you can connect through the RS-422
port on your programming device. Use the pinout values shown in
Figure 1-4 for the RS-422 cable.
Programming Device
Signal
Controller
Pin
Signal
DI+
DO+
DO+
DI+
GND
GND
DI
DO
DI
DO
9-Pin D-Type
Male Connector
1-5
1.3
Checking PC
Memory Available
Your TISOFT kit contains two 3.5-inch TISOFT programming disks. Use the
MS-DOS MEM and CHKDSK commands to make sure you have 540K
bytes of conventional system RAM available and 3.0 megabytes of hard-disk
space available to load TISOFT. (Additional space is required for RLL
program storage.)
Installing TISOFT
Programming
Software
After checking memory available, complete the steps listed below to load
TISOFT onto the fixed disk.
NOTE: If you need 5.25-inch disks, use the MS-DOS COPY command to
duplicate the 3.5-inch disks.
Installing TISOFT
Upgrade
Programming
Software
1.
2.
Type in the drive letter followed by a colon (A: or B: or the letter for
the drive you are using). Press Return .
3.
4.
Return
Set the DOS default directory to the directory where your current
TISOFT executable resides. (For example, type: CD C:\TI Return .)
2.
Insert disk #1 into the appropriate drive and type the drive letter
followed by INSTALL. (For example, insert the 3.5-inch disk in drive A
and type: A:\INSTALL Return .) Continue with the remaining disks as
instructed on the screen.
1-6
1.4
Installing TISOFT
Programming
Software in
Windows 95
For Windows 95, you can use the following procedure to install TISOFT, as
shown in Figure 1-5.
Insert
Disk 1
Programs
Documents
95
Settings
Find
Help
Run...
Shut Down...
Select Run...
Click
Start Button
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on OK or press
6.
Return
1-7
You can add a TISOFT icon on your Windows 95 desktop that starts
TISOFT in a DOS window simply by double-clicking the icon.
Arrange Icons
Line up Icons
Paste
TISOFT
Tisoft.ico
icon
Name of
your choice
TISOFT
Paste Special
New
Folder
Properties
Shortcut
Text Document
Select
New Shortcut
Figure 1-6 Creating a TISOFT Shortcut Icon for Your Windows Desktop
Follow these steps to add the shortcut icon:
1-8
1.
With the mouse cursor anywhere within the desktop background, click
the right mouse button to access the Windows desktop edit menu.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Next > button, give the icon a name (for example,
TISOFT), and click Finish.
Using PC Port 2
If your programming cable is connected to port 2 on your PC, you can set
TISOFT to communicate over port 2 by following these steps:
Select
TISOFT icon
TISOFT
Open
TISOFT
Send To
Cut
Copy
Create Shortcut
Delete
Select Properties
Rename
Properties
2.
With the mouse cursor on the selected TISOFT icon, click the right
mouse button to access the pop-up menu, and select Properties as
shown in Figure 1-7. A TISOFT Properties dialog appears.
3.
4.
In the Cmd line field, enter the port number in the path. For
example, the command line might read:
C:\TI\TI505.BAT p2
5.
Click on OK.
Now every time you double-click on the TISOFT shortcut icon, TISOFT
establishes communications automatically over port 2.
6.
For other settings in the TISOFT Properties dialog, refer to Section K.2
in Appendix K.
1-9
1.5
Starting TISOFT
Selecting TISOFT
Operating Software
Options
After TISOFT is installed, you are ready to select the TISOFT operating
software you need. The listing below defines the command options available.
TICON selects and runs the file conversion program. See Appendix C
for details on this upgrade procedure.
TI505 CVU selects TISOFT online to TIWAY using the CVU Host
Adapter Card. See Appendix E for information on setting up TIWAY
communications.
Using PC Port 1
To use COM1, type in the command for the TISOFT operating software you
selected from the list above (e.g., TI505) and press Return to invoke TISOFT.
Using PC Port 2
To use COM2, type in the command for the TISOFT operating software you
selected from the list above, followed by the port number (e.g., TI505 P2).
Then press Return to invoke TISOFT.
Using PC TIWAY
Adapter Card
1-10
Using H1 Network
To use H1 network with TISOFT, type in the name of the TISOFT operating
software you selected from the list above, followed by H1 (e.g., TI505 H1)
and press Return to invoke TISOFT. (Refer to Appendix G.)
Using TCP
Communications
To use the TCP network with TISOFT, type in the name of the TISOFT
operating software you selected from the list above, followed by TCP (e.g.,
TI505 TCP) and press Return to invoke TISOFT. (Refer to Appendix I.)
Using FMS
Communications
Displaying the
Start-up Screen
After you enter the TISOFT operating software selection you wish to use,
the Start-up Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 1-8.
From the Start-up Screen, you can choose on-line or off-line operation, color,
and programs. You can also select to display a list of useful key
combinations for TISOFT operations. Refer to Chapter 2 for instructions on
using these options.
Siemens
TISOFT 2
PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE
SIMATIC (R) 505 FAMILY
RELEASE 6.3
ORDER NUMBER PC505-6263
SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783-0032
Copyright (C) 1998
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
WARNING:
This computer program is protected by copyright law and international
treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,
and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
PRESS ALT-H FOR HELP ANYWHERE WITHIN TISOFT
EXIT-F1 HINTS-F2
ONLINE-F4
NETDATA
1-11
Starting TISOFT in
Windows
If you have created a TISOFT shortcut icon as described on page 1-8, you
can start TISOFT by double-clicking on the icon. TISOFT appears in a
window, as shown in Figure 1-9.
Figure 1-9 also shows some of the frequently used buttons. You can select
full-screen display of TISOFT, which provides an easier-to-read display and
a faster display update (for example, in status mode), by clicking the Full
Screen button shown. To return to the Window view, press ALT + Return .
This key sequence toggles between full-screen view and Window view.
The Properties button provides another way to access the TISOFT
Properties dialog described on page 1-9.
TISOFT
TI505 - PC5RT
Auto
Minimize
Maximize/Restore
Siemens
TISOFT 2
PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE
SIMATIC (R) 505 FAMILY
RELEASE 6.3
Properties
Full-screen
display
ONLINE-F4
NETDATA
1-12
Chapter 2
2-2
Configuring Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing Color Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting TISOFT Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning Color Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2.3
2-10
2.4
2-11
2.5
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2.2
2-1
2.1
Configuring Colors
You have the option of configuring the colors for your TISOFT screens. You
can select colors for background and foreground of the displays, messages,
cursor, and error messages. The range and shades of your colors depend
upon the graphics adapter card and monitor you have. Colors discussed in
this section are available with the CGA, EGA, and VGA display standards
and a color monitor. If your color selections are different, check the
documentation for your particular monitor and graphics adapter card.
Accessing Color
Option
To access the menu for configuring color on your TISOFT displays, press
COLOR-F6 at the Start-up Screen. You receive the color configuration menu
as illustrated in Figure 2-1.
Siemens
TISOFT 2
PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE
SIMATIC (R) 505 FAMILY
RELEASE 6.3
ORDER NUMBER PC505-6263
SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783-0032
Copyright (C) 1998
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
BG FG
All Rights Reserved
DISPLAY
1
F
SAMPLE
WARNING:
MESSAGE
1
B is protected
SAMPLE by copyright law and international
This computer program
CURSOR
7
1 reproduction
SAMPLE or distribution of this program,
treaties. Unauthorized
ERROR MSG. 7
4
SAMPLE
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,
and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
NETDATA
EXIT-F1 READDK-F2 WRITDK-F3
2-2
Selecting TISOFT
Colors
You can select foreground and background colors on your TISOFT displays
from the following list. Enter the number or letter beside your color
selection on the menu.
0 - Black
8 - Gray
1 - Blue
9 - Light Blue
2 - Green
A - Light Green
3 - Cyan
B - Light Cyan
4 - Red
C - Light Red
5 - Magenta
D - Light Magenta
6 - Brown
E - Yellow
7 - White
F - Bright White
The numbers 0 through 7 are valid for background colors; 0 through F are
valid entries for foreground colors.
Assigning Color
Selections
The menu shows a sample of the color corresponding to each number that
you type in. When the menu is displayed, the cursor is in the background
(BG) field for display color. Complete the steps below to enter your color
selection on the configuration menu.
1.
Type in the number of the color that you want the display background.
2.
Use the right arrow key to move the cursor to the foreground (FG) field.
3.
4.
Press
5.
6.
7.
Return
NOTE: If you do not save your new color configuration with WRITDK-F3,
the color values will return to the default settings when you exit and restart
TISOFT. This allows you to experiment with color combinations and still be
able to revert to the default color scheme.
2-3
2.2
Basic Features of
the PGMS System
A TISOFT program is a group of files with the same name but with different
extensions. A program or directory name can be up to eight characters long.
Two screen configurations are available to work with programs: the
Program Selection screen, shown in Figure 2-2, and the Directory Selection
screen, shown in Figure 2-3.
Both screens have a PATH line showing the current directory where
TISOFT looks for the selected program. Both screens also have a TISOFT
PROGRAMS sub-window containing a list of all programs in the current
directory.
The TISOFT Program Selection screen contains the FILENAME prompt
where program names can be typed. The FLDTGL-F6 key toggles the field
cursor between the TISOFT PROGRAMS sub-window and the FILENAME
prompt. Inside the sub-window, the arrow keys, PageUp, PageDn, Home,
and End keys are used to move the cursor. (See Figure 2-2.)
The TISOFT Directory Selection screen contains the DIRECTORY PATH
prompt where directory names can be typed. The FLDTGL-F6 key toggles
the field cursor between the DIRECTORY sub-window and the
DIRECTORY PATH prompt. Inside the sub-window, the arrow keys, PageUp,
PageDn, Home, and End keys are used to move the cursor. Letters followed
by colons are drives. (See Figure 2-3.)
2-4
Return
allows
Siemens
ABORT-F1
545 NETDATA
SELECT-F8
DIR-F5 FLDTGL-F6
Siemens
DIRECTORY
..
SUBDIR1
SUBDIR2
DOS
A:
B:
C:
BATCH4 NETDATA
Copyright (C) 1996
LOAD1 PUMP1
Siemens Energy
& Automation,
LOAD2
PUMP2Inc.
All Rights Reserved
LOAD3 PUMP3
MATCH STAMP
WARNING:
This computer program is protected by copyright law and international
DIRECTORY PATH: . .
treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,
and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
EXIT-F1
MKDIR-F2
545 NETDATA
SELECT-F8
2-5
Creating a New
Directory
Removing a
Directory
2-6
2.
Move the field cursor with the up/down arrows to select the drive letter
you want, or press FLDTGL-F6 and type the drive letter and colon at
the DIRECTORY PATH prompt.
3.
4.
Press EXIT-F1 or
Esc
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press EXIT-F1 or
Esc
2.
3.
4.
Press EXIT-F1 or
Esc
Selecting a
Directory
Formatting a
Floppy Disk
2.
3.
4.
Press EXIT-F1 or
Esc
Creating a New
Program Name
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press EXIT-F1 or
Esc
To create a new program name to contain a new program, follow these steps.
1.
Select the directory path where the new program is to reside. (See
Selecting a Directory.)
2.
3.
4.
Press SELECT-F8 or Return . The program function is exited and the new
program name appears on the lower right status line.
5.
2-7
Deleting a Program
Select the directory path where the program resides. (Refer to Selecting
a Directory.)
2.
3.
NOTE: Chart, table and certain other files are not part of the program and
are not copied, deleted, or renamed when the program is. See Appendix K
for a list of program and non-program files.
Renaming a
Program
2-8
1.
Select the directory path where the program resides. (See Selecting a
Directory.)
2.
3.
4.
Select the directory path where the program resides. (See Selecting a
Directory.)
2.
3.
4.
Type in the new program name and press ENTER-F8 or Return . The
renamed program appears in the TISOFT PROGRAMS sub-window.
Copying a
Program
Non-Program File
Selection
Select the directory path where the program resides. (See Selecting a
Directory.)
2.
3.
4.
Type in the new program name or new path and name and press
ENTER-F8 or Return . The new program appears in the TISOFT
PROGRAMS sub-window if it is copied to the same directory.
When you save/load a chart or table or import/export, you also have access
to the program management DOS-related functions, but not TISOFT
programs. All program management function keys are available for use with
chart and table files in the status/chart function or the import/export text
file. Figure 2-4 shows the file management display in the Status function.
NOTE: The chart, table, import/export, and certain other files are not part of
the program and are not copied, deleted, or renamed when the program is.
See Appendix K for a list of program and non-program files.
X0
Y2
X1
Y11
PATH: D:\TEST\DATA
X1
SELECT CHART
LOADER1
LOADER2
PUMP7
C0
X1
Y11
RUNG
RUNG
RUNG
RUNG
RUNG
RUNG
RUNG
Y10
X2
14
FILENAME: LOADER1
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
000014
000000
CHART: CHART1
LINES: 6
545 LOADER1 RN
ABORT-F1
DIR-F5 FLDTGL-F6
SELECT-F8
2-9
2.3
2-10
2.4
1
NOP
2
NOP
3
NOP
4
NOP
5
NOP
6
NOP
7
EXIT-F1
EDIT-F2
FIND-F3 DOCUM-F4
545 NETDATA
BLOCK-F5 REPLAC-F6 BLDCHT-F7 WRITDK-F8 +
SPACEBAR
LOOP-F6
545 NETDATA
ALARM-F7 SFPGM-F8 +
Esc
NOTE: You can press Esc from any function key line to exit to the next
higher level or previous screen.
For information on the various TISOFT operations, see the section that
describes the function you plan to perform.
2-11
2.5
NOTE: If your controller is a 575, refer to the next sections for information
on selecting applications and configuring ports.
EXIT-F1
EDIT-F2
FIND-F3 DOCUM-F4
545 NETDATA RN
AUX-F6 STATUS-F7 CHART-F8 +
BLOCK-F5
SPACEBAR
LOOP-F6
545 NETDATA RN
ALARM-F7 SFPGM-F8 +
Esc
NOTE: You can press Esc from any function key line to exit to the next
higher level or previous screen.
2-12
Selecting On-Line
Operation for the
575 Controller
For 575 controllers, pressing ONLINE-F4 displays a screen for selecting the
application to be accessed by the controller. See Figure 2-7.
APPLICATION ID TABLE
ADDR
00
01
TYPE
APPLICATIONS
575
575
A
B
CONNECTION ID: A
NETDATA
EXIT-F1 CURPRT-F2 CURDSK-F3
PORTCF-F6
ENTER-F8
2-13
PORT 1 CONFIGURATION
BOARD ADDRESS: 00
K BAUD: (0.3 1.2 2.4 4.8 9.6 19.2 38.4 57.6 115.2) . . . . 115.2
CHARACTER SIZE WITHOUT PARITY: (7 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PARITY: (NONE EVEN ODD MARK SPACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ODD
NUMBER OF STOP BITS: (1 1.5 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FLOW CONTROL: (NONE DSR/DTR XON/XOFF BOTH) . . . . . . NONE
FROM PORT
NETDATA
EXIT-F1 READ-F2
WRITE-F4
2-14
2.
Move the field cursor to the PORT CONFIGURATION line and type the
port number to read.
3.
Put the field cursor on the BOARD ADDRESS line and type the board
address to read.
4.
Press READ-F2. The port configuration for the selected port and
address is read from the controller and displayed.
5.
2.
Move the field cursor to the PORT CONFIGURATION line and type the
number of the port that you want to be the destination of the port
configuration data.
3.
Put the field cursor on the BOARD ADDRESS line and type the address
of the 575 board that is to be the destination of the port configuration
data.
4.
For each of the other fields, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
the parameter values and press Return to select the value you want.
5.
NOTE: If the port you are changing is the port TISOFT is connected to, but
the settings are not what TISOFT uses, when you press WRITE-F4, the
following prompt appears to confirm your action:
TISOFT MAY NOT WORK WITH THIS PORT CONFIGURATION, CONTINUE?
If you press YES-F2 to change the port configuration, TISOFT may or may
not continue to communicate with the controller. Press NO-F1 to abort the
operation.
6.
2-15
Chapter 3
TISOFT Basics
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
TISOFT Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-2
3-2
TISOFT Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
TISOFT Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
On-Line/Off-Line Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Line/Off-Line Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Line Only Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Line Only Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
TISOFT Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-10
Accessing Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Key Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Element Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Element List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-11
TISOFT Basics
3-1
3.1
TISOFT Functionality
Programming
and Utilities
EDIT
EXIT
HORZ
| |
VERT
| / |
HORZD
( )
VERTD
( / )
DELNET
BOX
UNIQUE
|R|(I)
PG/RN
Online Only
COMMNT
SPACEBAR (+)
INSERT
Diagnostics,
Memory and I/O
Configuration
3-2
TISOFT Basics
When additional functions are available, the plus (+) sign appears in
the lower right corner of the screen. To access the additional functions,
press the spacebar. Press the spacebar again to return to the original
group of functions.
You can press Esc from any function key line to exit to the next higher
level or previous screen.
3.2
TISOFT Menus
Reading TISOFT
Displays
TISOFT menus are arranged for easy access to all functions. Ladder
instructions are accessed by element type. Selecting a contact, coil, or box
invokes menus or prompts for each element type. Loop, Analog Alarm, and
Special Function programming are also accessed from the primary function
menus available after selection of on- or off-line mode. For example,
selecting CONFME-F2 from the primary menus invokes the Configure
Memory functions as illustrated by Figure 3-2.
PLC TYPE: 575
MEMORY CONFIGURATION
USER MEMORY
SYSTEM MEMORY
LADDER
(L) . . . . . 30 KBYTES . . .
90 KBYTES
VARIABLE
(V) . . . . . 32 KBYTES . . .
32 KBYTES
CONSTANT (K) . . . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
SPECIAL
(S) . . . . . 32 KBYTES . . .
32 KBYTES
COMPILED SF (CS) . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
USER SUB
(U) . . . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
GLOBAL
(G) . . . . . 32 K
TMR/CTR
.....
1 K
...
5 KBYTES
DRUMS
. . . . . 64
...
3 KBYTES
SHIFT REG
.....
1 K
...
1 KBYTES
TABLE MOVE
.....
1 K
...
2 KBYTES
ONE SHOTS
.....
1 K
...
1 KBYTES
CONTROL RELAYS . . . . 23 K
I/O (X,Y,WX,WY)
.....
8 K
TOTAL SYSTEM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIGURED SYSTEM MEMORY . . . . . . . .
REMAINING SYSTEM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . .
FROM RAM
REQUESTED OPERATION IN PROGRESS
EXIT-F1 READRM-F2 WRITRM-F3
545-F4
545L-F5
320 KBYTES
166 KBYTES
154 KBYTES
575-F6
555 NETDATA
555-F7 REQAPP-F8 +
The first line of the display gives the display title (for example,
Auxiliary Functions; Memory Configuration), if any.
The main body of the screen shows information about the function you
select; it may be either a listing of options or a blank display for making
entries.
The source of the display (from RAM, from PLC) is given at the bottom
left of the screen.
TISOFT displays messages that help you detect syntax errors, illegal
operations, and similar problems. See Appendix B for a listing of error
messages and possible corrections.
Status is shown on the lower right side of the screen. In off-line mode,
there are two fields. The first field shows the controller model, and the
second field shows the program name. In on-line mode, a third field is
added that shows the operating mode of the controller.
TISOFT Basics
3-3
3.3
You access all TISOFT primary functions, programming and utilities, from
the ladder display. The plus (+) sign at the lower right of this, and other
screens, indicates that you can access additional function keys by pressing
the spacebar. Figure 3-3 illustrates the initial on-line ladder display. After
you enter a program, your ladder display then shows a section of that
program when you invoke the display. All references in this manual to
Ladder Display refer to this screen. The numbers on the left side of the
display are the ladder addresses being displayed.
EXIT-F1
EDIT-F2
FIND-F3 DOCUM-F4
BLOCK-F5
545 NETDATA PG
AUX-F6 STATUS-F7 CHART-F8 +
SPACEBAR
LOOP-F6
545 NETDATA PG
ALARM-F7 SFPGM-F8 +
Your TISOFT ladder display is 12 columns wide and 7 rows long. (The
actual ladder rung can be much longer.)
Element Size
3-4
TISOFT Basics
3.4
TISOFT Functions
On-Line/Off-Line
Defined
You can use TISOFT in either the on- or off-line mode. On-line mode allows
communication with the controller; off-line mode communicates with the
programming device only. Since there is no communication with the
controller in off-line mode, you can only save programs or other inputs to a
selected program on disk.
You can access the HELP system for information at virtually any point in
TISOFT by pressing Alt H.
Certain functions are available either on- or off-line; some are available
on-line only; and some, off-line only. Brief descriptions of the functions
available in on- and off-line modes are given in the following paragraphs.
On-Line/Off-Line
Functions
The following functions are available from both the on-line and off-line
ladder display.
EXIT or
Esc
TISOFT Basics
3-5
These functions are available only from the off-line ladder display menu.
P allows you to invoke the password function.
REPLAC enables you to search for and replace single and multiple
elements in a program.
BLDCHT allows you to build and save status charts off-line.
WRITDK writes your program to disk under the selected program name.
Most of your off-line programming is done in the programming device
RAM until you save it by pressing WRITDK at the ladder display
menu.
On-Line Only
Functions
These functions are available only from the on-line ladder display menu.
AUX or A enables access to controller auxiliary functions.
STATUS or S allows you to monitor the status of elements in ladder
rungs.
CHART allows you to monitor and initialize selected I/O values and
variables in a table format. You can also access the BLDCHT function
on-line through chart.
3-6
TISOFT Basics
3.5
TISOFT Keys
Using Function
Keys
You have quick access to many frequently used operations through keys on
the programming device keyboard. Table 3-1 provides a complete list of hard
key equivalents. You can also press HINTS-F2 from the start-up screen for a
complete list of function and edit hard keys. The following list describes
some of the commonly-used functions available with hard keys.
ESC returns to the previous level of menu operations.
Print Screen invokes the print operation to print the current display.
Ctrl L invokes the pop-up synonym editor to allow you to edit synonyms.
Shift
or
NOTE: You must disengage the Num Lock and Scroll Lock keys to enable the
hard keys on the numeric keypad.
Initiating TISOFT
Functions with
Hard Keys
Whenever a function appears on the menu, the hard key equivalent of the
function is enabled. You can use the hard key to invoke the function rather
than using a function key available on a TISOFT menu. Some operations
are accessible through Ctrl and Alt keys only, such as element usage (Ctrl U).
Table 3-1 shows a listing of the function key alternatives and the CTRL/ALT
functions.
TISOFT Basics
3-7
Key
Comment
Abort
ESC
AUX
BOX
Coils
Y
C
WY
V
G
W
Contacts
X
Y
C
WX/WY
V
K
G
W
Contact/Coil Toggle
Cursor Position Display Toggle
Decrement
Address
Delete Character
Enable/Disable
END
/
Ctrl T
F10
DEL
Backspace
END
ENTER
ENTER
Equal to
EXIT
ESC
FIND
Ctrl F
>
? or \
HOME
HORZ
TISOFT Basics
Alt H
HOME
3-8
Key
Comment
HORZD
Immediate I/O
F9
INS
Insert Mode
Increment Address
Insert Character
INSERT
K Memory Editor
L Memory Address
Less Than
Macro Functions
INS
Inserts a column
INS
Inserts a row
Ctrl K
L
<
Alt R
Record macro
Alt S
Stop macro
Alt P
Play macro
Alt L
Alt W
Alt O
NO
Not Equal to
Off-Line Password
Output
Page Up
PgUp
Page Down
PgDn
Page Left
Ctrl
Page Right
Ctrl
Pop-up Synonyms
Print Screen
Ctrl L
Edits synonym/descriptor
Ctrl PrtSc
PrtSc
Quick SF Edit
Ctrl O
Go to SF to show or edit
Alt Q
Single Scan
Status
Usage Table
Ctrl U
V Memory Editor
Ctrl V
VERT
Creates Up line
VERTD
XREF
YES
Ctrl X
Y
TISOFT Basics
3-9
3.6
Accessing Help
You can access information about TISOFT at any location. Press Alt H to
display the HELP menu. Figure 3-4 shows the function help display from
the ladder display screen. As shown on the menu below, four types of help
are available: Hot Key Help, Function Help, Element Help, and Message
Help. To see another type of help, use the arrow keys to position the cursor
on any of the Help types in the top line. You can also move the cursor down
to any of the topics listed in the help window, and press Return for additional
information on the selected topic.
When you invoke the HELP menu, F1 is always available to define the keys
used for cursor movement and paging within the Help system.
NOP
1
2
3
4
5
6
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
EXIT-F1
EDIT-F2
FIND-F3 DOCUM-F4
BLOCK-F5
545 NETDATA
AUX-F6 STATUS-F7 CHART-F8 +
Hot Key help gives you a listing of keys that are active (both function and
hard keys) on the current display and describes the operation performed by
each of the keys.
Function Help
Element Help
3-10
TISOFT Basics
NOTE: You can also reference other manuals to obtain help in designing or
changing your programs. For example, the user manuals for your controllers
explain the functionality of the instructions and give guidelines for using a
particular instruction. The system manuals for your controllers should be
used to supplement the information provided in this manual.
Element List
As you enter or edit your program, you can access a List display at any
point that has a prompt requesting an element entry. The List display lists
the valid entries for that particular field. Figure 3-5 shows the List display
available by pressing \ or Shift ? at the FIND selection prompt. Each of
the entries shown on the display are valid entries for the current prompt. To
access element help for an explanation of the function of a particular box,
position the cursor on the box name, and press HELP-F4.
NOP
1
NOP
LIST
2
3
4
5
6
ELEMENT
X
Y
C
V
K
WX
WY
STW
B
W
MORE
COIL
END
ENDC
GTS
JMP
JMPE
LBL
MCR
MCRE
RTN
SBR
MORE
BOX
ABSV
ADD
BITC
BITP
BITS
CBD
CDB
CMP
CTR
DCAT
MORE
LOOP
LACK
LADB
LCFH
LCFL
LERR
LHA
LHHA
LKC
LKD
LLA
MORE
ALARM
AACK
AADB
ACFH
ACFL
AERR
AHA
AHHA
ALA
ALLA
AODA
MORE
MISC.
OUTC
OUTY
NEXT
NXTIN
L
ADDR
DSP
DSC
DCP
DCC
MORE
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
EXIT-F1
HELP-F4
545 NETDATA
SELECT-F8
TISOFT Basics
3-11
Chapter 4
4.2
4.3
4.4
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-1
4.1
Displaying Memory
Configuration
You can display the memory configuration from either on-line or off-line.
The source of the display is determined by whether you are performing the
read on- or off-line. Off-line, you can read memory configuration only from
programming device RAM. On-line, you can read the configuration from
either your selected program on disk or the controller.
When you initially access the Memory Configuration menu, a read is
performed that gives you the configuration from the source you are
currently using.
Displaying Off-Line
Press OFFLINE-F8.
2.
Press SPACEBAR.
3.
Press CONFME-F2.
4.
Press READRM-F2.
EXIT-F1
EDIT-F2
FIND-F3 DOCUM-F4
545 NETDATA
BLOCK-F5 REPLAC-F6 BLDCHT-F7 WRITDK-F8 +
SPACEBAR
LOOP-F6
545 NETDATA
ALARM-F7 SFPGM-F8 +
575-F6
545 NETDATA
555-F7 REQAPP-F8 +
F2
FROM RAM
EXIT-F1 READRM-F2 WRITRM-F3
545-F4
545L-F5
4-2
Displaying On-Line
To show the memory configuration from your program disk, complete the
following steps. (Refer also to Figure 4-2.)
1.
Press ONLINE-F4.
2.
Press SPACEBAR.
3.
Press CONFME-F2.
4.
Press READDK-F2.
Press ONLINE-F4.
2.
Press SPACEBAR.
3.
Press CONFME-F2.
4.
Press READPC-F4.
EXIT-F1
EDIT-F2
FIND-F3 DOCUM-F4
BLOCK-F5
545 NETDATA PG
AUX-F6 STATUS-F7 CHART-F8 +
SPACEBAR
LOOP-F6
545 NETDATA PG
ALARM-F7 SFPGM-F8 +
F2
FROM PLC
EXIT-F1 READDK-F2 WRITDK-F3 READPC-F4 WRITPC-F5
545 NETDATA PG
REQAPP-F8 +
4-3
4.2
Accessing
Configuration
Menu
Access the off-line memory configuration menu from the TISOFT Start-up
Screen by completing the steps listed below. If you are already off-line at the
ladder display, begin with step 2. Figure 4-3 shows the off-line menu.
1.
Press OFFLINE-F8.
2.
Press SPACEBAR.
3.
Press CONFME-F2.
MEMORY CONFIGURATION
USER MEMORY
SYSTEM MEMORY
LADDER
(L) . . . . . 32 KBYTES . . .
96 KBYTES
VARIABLE
(V) . . . . . 52 KBYTES . . .
52 KBYTES
CONSTANT (K) . . . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
SPECIAL
(S) . . . . . 32 KBYTES . . .
32 KBYTES
COMPILED SF (CS) . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
USER SUB
(U) . . . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
TMR/CTR
.....
DRUMS
.....
SHIFT REG
.....
TABLE MOVE
.....
ONE SHOTS
.....
CONTROL RELAYS . . . .
I/O (X,Y,WX,WY)
.....
1
64
1
1
1
32
8
K
K
K
K
K
K
...
...
...
...
...
5
3
1
2
1
KBYTES
KBYTES
KBYTES
KBYTES
KBYTES
545-F4
545L-F5
575-F6
555 NETDATA
555-F7 REQAPP-F8 +
You can make entries only to the USER MEMORY fields for specific memory
types. The SYSTEM MEMORY column cannot be edited, except for Total
System Memory. The numbers in this column give you the bytes of system
memory used by each type of user memory you configure.
The TOTAL SYSTEM MEMORY field must match the total memory available
with your controller model. Configured System Memory and Remaining
System Memory numbers are supplied by TISOFT.
4-4
Selecting the
Controller
Since there are differences in memory types among controllers, your first
step should be to select the controller model that you are configuring. To do
this, press the function key that corresponds to your model number. When
selecting a 565 controller, you must enter the S-memory configuration
before the controller type changes from 560.
Configuration
Procedure
Return
Position the cursor in the TOTAL SYSTEM MEMORY field. Type in the
number of Kbytes that correspond to your controller model. It is essential
that you enter the correct memory size. When you attempt to load the
configuration to your controller, you receive a controller error if the memory
size is incorrect.
Type in the desired size for each memory type. For example, with the cursor
in the Ladder memory field, use the numeric keys to change the existing
number. Note that the entries you make for V, K, and L memory sizes are in
kbytes, not words. Then use Return or arrow keys to move the cursor to the
next memory type to be changed.
NOTE: If you enter a memory configuration smaller than that required for a
program you have entered, the program is truncated to fit the smaller
configuration.
Entering
Configuration
4-5
4.3
Accessing
Configuration
Menu
Access the on-line memory configuration menu from the TISOFT Start-up
Screen by completing the steps listed below. If you are already on-line at the
ladder display, begin with step 2. Figure 4-4 shows the on-line menu.
1.
Press ONLINE-F4.
2.
Press SPACEBAR.
3.
Press CONFME-F2.
MEMORY CONFIGURATION
USER MEMORY
SYSTEM MEMORY
LADDER
(L) . . . . . 32 KBYTES . . .
96 KBYTES
VARIABLE
(V) . . . . . 52 KBYTES . . .
52 KBYTES
CONSTANT (K) . . . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
SPECIAL
(S) . . . . . 32 KBYTES . . .
32 KBYTES
COMPILED SF (CS) . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
USER SUB
(U) . . . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
TMR/CTR
.....
DRUMS
.....
SHIFT REG
.....
TABLE MOVE
.....
ONE SHOTS
.....
CONTROL RELAYS . . . .
I/O (X,Y,WX,WY)
.....
1
64
1
1
1
32
8
K
K
K
K
K
K
...
...
...
...
...
5
3
1
2
1
KBYTES
KBYTES
KBYTES
KBYTES
KBYTES
555 NETDATA PG
REQAPP-F8
NOTE: You cannot change the controller type, internal C/control relay, or
total system memory fields when doing an on-line configuration.
Configuration
Procedure
4-6
Use the arrow keys and/or Return to position the cursor in the fields to make
entries. Type in the desired number of bytes for each memory type. For
example, with the cursor in the LADDER memory field, use the numeric
keys to change the existing number. Then use Return or arrow keys to move
the cursor to the next memory type to be changed.
WARNING
If you enter a memory configuration smaller than that required for a program
you have entered, the program is truncated to fit the smaller configuration. This
can cause unexpected process operation to a controller in RUN mode.
Unexpected process operation can cause death or serious injury to personnel,
and/or damage to equipment.
Use caution when writing a changed memory configuration to a controller in
RUN mode.
Entering
Configuration
NOTE: You can change memory configuration in Program Mode only. If the
controller is in Run mode, TISOFT prompts you to confirm changing to
Program mode before writing the new memory configuration to the
controller. After the operation, the controller goes back to Run mode.
Checking Memory
Availability
MEMORY AVAILABILITY
CONFIGURED
(BYTES)
LADDER (L) . . . . . . . . .
32768
COMPILED L (CL) . . . .
( 65536)
SPECIAL (S) . . . . . . . . .
32768
USED
(BYTES)
AVAILABLE
(BYTES)
188
32580
66
32702
AVAILABLE
(WORDS)
16290
4-7
4.4
MEMORY CONFIGURATION
USER MEMORY
SYSTEM MEMORY
LADDER
(L) . . . . . 32 KBYTES . . .
96 KBYTES
VARIABLE
(V) . . . . . 52 KBYTES . . .
52 KBYTES
CONSTANT (K) . . . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
SPECIAL
(S) . . . . . 32 KBYTES . . .
32 KBYTES
COMPILED SF (CS) . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
USER SUB
(U) . . . . .
0 KBYTES . . .
0 KBYTES
GLOBAL
(G) . . . . . 32 K
TMR/CTR
.....
1 K
...
5 KBYTES
===========
= = = = = = = = = =. =. .=. .= =64
= = = = = = = =. .=. = = = 3= KBYTES
=============
DRUMS
APPLICATION
ID:
SHIFT REG
.....
1 K
...
1 KBYTES
TABLE MOVE
.....
1 K
...
2 KBYTES
Application ID field can be edited off-line only.
REQUIRED APPLICATIONS:
ONE SHOTS
.....
1 K
...
1 KBYTES
can be edited on- or off-line.
CONTROL RELAYS . . .These
. 23 fields
K
OPTIONAL APPLICATIONS:
I/O (X,Y,WX,WY)
.....
8 K
CPU MODE LOCKED
TOTALTO:
SYSTEM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIGURED SYSTEM
MEMORY
Off-line
Menu . . . . . . . .
FROM RAM
REMAINING SYSTEM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . .
320 KBYTES
166 KBYTES
154 KBYTES
575 NETDATA
FROM PLC
On-line Menu
575 NETDATA PG
4-8
The following fields display information about applications. Only the IDs
listed in the REQUIRED or OPTIONAL fields are valid for use as G-memory
parameters in your RLL program.
4-9
Chapter 5
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5-2
5-2
5-4
5-6
Configuring I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-14
5-14
5-1
5.1
Displaying the
Configuration from
RAM
Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO-F3. The 505 Base Status screen
appears. See Figure 5-1.
505 CHANNEL: 1
BASE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ENABLED
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
BASE STATUS
CONFIGURED
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
545 NETDATA
EN/DIS-F5 PRODP-F6
5-2
2.
3.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired base number on the screen.
4.
Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO-F3. The 505 Base Status screen
appears. See Figure 5-1.
2.
3.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the CHANNEL field and type in the
channel number.
4.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the BASE field and type in the base
number.
5.
Press READRM-F3.
NOTE: You can change the base number either by using the PgUp/PgDn
keys (if the last operation was a Read operation), or by typing a number in
the BASE field and pressing READRM-F3. You can view bases by using
PgUp/PgDn keys for the currently selected channel number only.
BASE . . . . 00
I/O
NUMBER OF BIT AND WORD I/O SPECIAL
FUNCTION
SLOT ADDRESS
X
Y
WX
WY
BASE
ENABLED
01 . . . . . 0001 . . . . . . 16 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
02 . . . . . 0017 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 16 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
03 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
04 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
05 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
06 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
07 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
08 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
09 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
10 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
11 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
12 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
13 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
14 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
15 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
16 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
FROM RAM
545 NETDATA
EXIT-F1 SHOW-F2 READRM-F3 WRITRM-F4
EN/DIS-F6 DELCHN-F7 CLRBS-F8
5-3
Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO-F3. The 505 Base Status screen
appears. See Figure 5-3.
505 CHANNEL: 1
BASE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ENABLED
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
BASE STATUS
CONFIGURED
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
ONLINE
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
545 NETDATA PG
EN/DIS-F5 PRODP-F6
3.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired base number on the screen.
4.
5.
5-4
1.
Press SPACEBAR and then CONFIO-F3. The 505 Base Status screen
appears. See Figure 5-3.
2.
3.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the CHANNEL field and type in the
channel number.
4.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the BASE field and type in the base
number.
5.
NOTE: You can change the base number either by using the PgUp/PgDn
keys (if the last operation was a Read operation), or by typing a number in
the BASE field and pressing READDK-F3 or READPC-F5. You can view bases
by using the PgUp/PgDn keys for the currently selected channel number
only.
BASE . . . . 00
I/O
NUMBER OF BIT AND WORD I/O SPECIAL
FUNCTION
BASE
SLOT ADDRESS
X
Y
WX
WY
ENABLED
01 . . . . . 0001 . . . . . . 16 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
02 . . . . . 0017 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 16 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
03 . . . . . 0033 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 04 . . . 04 . . . . . . . YES
04 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
05 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
06 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
07 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
08 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
09 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
10 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
11 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
12 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
13 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
14 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
15 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
16 . . . . . 0000 . . . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . . 00 . . . 00 . . . . . . . NO
FROM PLC
545 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1 SHOW-F2 READDK-F3 WRITDK-F4 READPC-F5 WRITPC-F6 READBS-F7 CLRBS-F8 +
5-5
You must be on-line to read a base configuration from the base. To read a
base configuration, complete the following steps. See Figure 5-3.
1.
Press the SPACEBAR and then CONFIO-F3. The 505 Base Status screen
appears. See Figure 5-3.
2.
3.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired base on the screen.
4.
5.
Press READBS-F7.
NOTE: You can change the base number either by using the PgUp/PgDn
keys (if the last operation was a Read operation), or by typing a number in
the BASE field and pressing READBS-F7. You can view bases by using the
PgUp/PgDn keys for the currently selected channel number only.
5-6
5.2
Configuring I/O
Controller
Functionality in
Configuration
Keep in mind that, while you can configure I/O either on-line (with the
controller) or off-line (programming device only), functional differences exist
between the two modes. When on-line, you can perform those functions that
require interfacing with the controller. For instance, you must be on-line to
write your I/O configuration to the controller or to read the configuration of
a base from the base itself. Configurations saved off-line go to the selected
program on disk.
I/O Configuration
Guidelines
Before entering your I/O configuration, be sure that the I/O points you select
conform to the following guidelines.
The number for the I/O address must begin on an 8-point boundary. An
8-point boundary is (n*8) + 1, (for example, 1, 9, 17, etc.). Addresses not
starting on an 8-point boundary are changed to do so when you write
the values.
Refer to the I/O module manual for the number of bit and/or word I/O
points required for each module. Valid entries for modules with more
than 8 points are even numbers from 2 through 28, 32 and 64.
NOTE: 520, 520C, 530, 530C, and 525 are 8-slot programmable controllers.
Configuration
Procedure
Press the SPACEBAR and then CONFIO-F3 to produce the 505 Base
Status screen. See Figure 5-1 for off-line operation, or see Figure 5-3 for
on-line operation.
2.
3.
Use the arrow keys to position the cursor at the CHANNEL field and
type in the desired channel number.
5-7
Use the arrow keys to position the cursor at the BASE field and type in
the desired base number.
NOTE: You can change the base number either by using the PgUp/PgDn
keys (if the last operation was a Read operation), or by typing a number in
the BASE field and pressing a read function READRM, READPC, READDK or
READBS. You can view bases by using the PgUp/PgDn keys for the currently
selected channel number.
5.
6.
7.
Type in the number of I/O points (X, Y, WX, or WY) required for the
type of module being configured.
8.
9.
Return
NOTE: Base 0 cannot be disabled. 520, 520C, 530, 530C, and 525 are 8-slot
programmable controllers.
Saving the
Configuration
Off-line: After completing entries for a base, press WRITRM-F4 to save the
configuration to RAM. (The configuration is also saved on disk.)
On-line: After completing entries for a base, press WRITDK-F4 to write the
configuration to disk. Press WRITPC-F6 to write the configuration to the
controller.
WARNING
5-8
5.3
Clearing a Base
I/O Display
Clearing a Base
I/O Configuration
On-Line
Start from the Base I/O Configuration screen. See Figure 5-2 or
Figure 5-4.
2.
Type in the desired channel number at the CHANNEL field at the top of
the screen.
3.
Type in the desired base number at the BASE field at the top of the
screen.
4.
Press CLRBS-F8.
Start from the on-line Base I/O Configuration screen. See Figure 5-4.
2.
Type in the desired channel number, in the field at the top of the
screen.
3.
Type in the desired base number at the BASE field at the top of the
screen.
4.
Press CLRBS-F8.
5.
5-9
Start from the off-line Base I/O Configuration screen. See Figure 5-2.
2.
Type in the desired channel number at the CHANNEL field at the top of
the screen.
3.
Type in the desired base number at the BASE field at the top of the
screen.
4.
Press CLRBS-F8.
5.
5-10
Deleting a Channel
(560/565 Only)
Channels are paired on the RCC cards (for example, 1&2; 3&4, etc.).
When one of a pair of channels is deleted, so is the other.
All channels above the highest channel number entered are also
deleted; for example, if you enter channel 5, channels 5, 6, 7, and 8 are
deleted.
Type in the desired channel number at the CHANNEL field at the top of
the screen.
2.
Press DELCHN-F7.
3.
5-11
5.4
Showing I/O
Configuration
Chart Display
With the SHOW function, you can display individual I/O points for a base
configuration, either on- or off-line. You also have the option of displaying
the synonyms for each point. Figure 5-5 illustrates the format of the display.
To use the SHOW function, complete the following steps at the Base I/O
Configuration screen. See Figure 5-2 for off-line mode and Figure 5-4 for
on-line mode.
1.
Enter the desired channel and base numbers at the top of the Base I/O
Configuration screen, and press the appropriate read key.
2.
Use the PgUp/PgDn keys to scroll the display one screen at a time. Use the
up/down arrow keys to scroll the display one row at a time.
BASE . . . . 00
SLOT 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X0233 X0234 X0235 X0236 X0237 X0238 X0239 X0240
SLOT 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X0161 X0162 X0163 X0164 X0165 X0166 X0167 X0168
SLOT 2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X0169 X0170 X0171 X0172 X0173 X0174 X0175 X0176
SLOT 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Y0297 Y0298 Y0299 Y0300 Y0301 Y0302 Y0303 Y0304
SLOT 3
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Y0305 Y0306 Y0307 Y0308 Y0309 Y0310 Y0310 Y0311
FROM RAM
565 NETDATA
EXIT-F1 SYNTGL-F2
5-12
After pressing SHOW, you can choose to display the synonyms with the
points in a base. Press SYNTGL-F2 to toggle the synonym display on and off.
With synonyms on, you have 12 I/O points and their synonyms displayed.
5.5
Entering the
Compare
From the on-line Base I/O Configuration screen, complete the following
steps to initiate a comparison of a base configuration with that in the
controller.
1.
Enter the desired channel and base numbers at the top of the screen.
See Figure 5-4.
2.
Press SPACEBAR.
3.
When the compare finishes, you receive a display such as that shown in
Figure 5-6. The display highlights any mismatches between the controller
and the base and places asterisks beside the highlighted line.
** 01 . . .
** 02 . . .
03 . . .
** 04 . . .
05 . . .
06 . . .
07 . . .
08 . . .
09 . . .
10 . . .
11 . . .
12 . . .
13 . . .
14 . . .
15 . . .
16 . . .
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
FROM PLC
Y
WX
WY
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
SF
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
X
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
........
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
BASE . . . . . 00
FROM BASE
Y
WX
WY
08
08
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
07
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
SF
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
545 NETDATA RN
EXIT-F1
5-13
5.6
Finding an I/O
Point
At the 505 Base Status screen press FIND-F3. See Figure 5-3.
2.
3.
505 CHANNEL: 1
BASE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
FIND I/O POINT: X0002
EXIT-F1
ENABLED
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
FOUND AT:
BASE STATUS
CONFIGURED
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
CHAN: 1
Return
BASE: 2
ONLINE
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
SLOT: 4
DONE
545 NETDATA PG
NEXT-F2
5-14
If only one (or the last) I/O Point is found, the location (CHAN,
BASE, and SLOT) and a DONE message displays.
If more than one I/O Point is found, the location (CHAN, BASE, and
SLOT) and a MORE message displays. Press NEXT-F2 to display the
next location.
Chapter 6
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Getting Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-3
6.2
6-4
6.3
6-6
Using Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning or Modifying I/O Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-15
6-15
6-17
6-19
6-19
6-19
6-20
6-20
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6-1
6.1
Introduction
This chapter describes I/O configuration for devices that use the
PROFIBUS-DP I/O channel.
For information about configuring devices that use the Series 505 I/O
channel, see Chapter 5.
Getting Ready
6-2
You are ready to configure your I/O when you complete the following tasks.
Overview
To configure I/O used on the PROFIBUS-DP channel for your Series 505
system, you must use two configuration utilities.
The first utility, COM PROFIBUS, allows you to perform the following
tasks.
Save your configuration. (This file should be archived in case you want
to make configuration changes at a later time.)
Use the Merge function to import information from the binary file that
you created with COM PROFIBUS.
Toggle between operate and stop mode, and between synchronous and
asynchronous communications.
6-3
6.2
6-4
Comment
Select a master.
Select a host.
Optional. You can accept the default settings, unless you wish to modify
one, such as baud rate.
Assign slave(s).
Parameterize slave(s).
Configure slave(s).
Required. You can use either the ID or the Order Number list to select
I/O module types and assign them to the appropriate slots in your slave
device. The Comment field is optional. Do not fill in the I. Addr. or
O. Addr. fields; you will assign starting I/O addresses to each module in
TISOFT, and any data you assign to these fields in COM PROFIBUS is
overwritten.
Optional. Allows you to add or delete slaves from your configuration later,
without re-entering all data into COM PROFIBUS.
Required. For convenience, you can select the disk drive and directory
where your TISOFT program is stored, and assign the binary file the same
name as the program where you intend to use the I/O. An extension (.2BF)
is automatically assigned to the binary file; do not change this extension.
You are ready to perform configuration tasks in TISOFT; see Section 6.3.
6-5
6.3
Using Merge
The Merge function in TISOFT allows you to import configuration data from
the binary file that you created with COM PROFIBUS (described in Section
6.2). The steps you take are the same regardless of whether you are
importing data from an entirely new configuration, or merely importing
selected items that have been modified from a previous configuration
session in COM PROFIBUS. The Merge function performs a comparison
between the current configuration information and the contents of the
selected binary file exported from COM PROFIBUS. Only new information
is written to TISOFT; pre-existing, unchanged configuration information
(for example, I/O addresses) is not lost.
To execute Merge, you must be running TISOFT, and the binary file (with
its .2BF extension) that you created with COM PROFIBUS must be in a
known location. Follow the steps below to execute Merge.
1.
2.
Press the SPACEBAR ( + ) to get the secondary function key line, and
then press CONFIO-F3 to get the base status screen. Figure 6-1 shows
the function key line.
545 NETDATA
EXIT-F1 CONFIG-F2
FIND-F3
EN/DIS-F5 PRO-DP-F6
If the status display is set to Series 505 I/O, press PRO-DP-F6 to toggle
the display to PROFIBUS-DP I/O. See Figure 6-2.
NOTE: Once you select PROFIBUS-DP, all status and configuration screens
display PROFIBUS-DP I/O information until the end of your TISOFT
session, or until you use the 505IO-F6 toggle to return to Series 505 I/O
configuration.
EXIT-F1 CONFIG-F2
545 NETDATA
DELETE-F8
6-6
4.
5.
FILENAME: STATION_1
ABORT-F1
DIR-F5 FLDTGL-F6
545 NETDATA
SELECT-F8
Use the list to select the binary file from which you want to import
configuration data. (If you type the filename at the prompt, do not type
the .2BF extension; type only the filename.) Press Return or SELECT-F8.
Result: The PROFIBUS-DP Slave Status screen displays configuration
information obtained from the COM PROFIBUS binary file that you
have just merged into TISOFT.
You are now ready to configure starting I/O addresses for your
PROFIBUS-DP slaves.
Assigning or
Modifying I/O
Addresses
There are three ways that you can assign or modify the starting module
addresses of your PROFIBUS-DP slaves. You can edit on-line, edit off-line,
or use the Update function. Section 6.4 describes Update, which is an
automated procedure that loads bus parameters and prompts you to provide
addresses for any modules requiring them. If you want to edit individual
module addresses selectively, see Section 6.5.
To familiarize yourself with the options available from the on- and off-line
status and configuration screens, and practice moving between them before
you load your configuration, consult Section 6.6.
6-7
6.4
I/O Configuration
Guidelines
Using Update
For bit or bit-and-word modules (but not for word-only modules), the
number for the I/O address must begin on an eight-point boundary. An
eight-point boundary is (n*8) + 1, (for example, 1, 9, 17, etc.). Addresses
not starting on an eight-point boundary are changed to do so when you
write the values.
WARNING
Follow the steps below to load your I/O configuration to the controller.
1.
2.
Press the spacebar ( + ) to get the secondary function key line, and then
press CONFIO-F3 to get the status screen.
3.
If the status display is set to Series 505 I/O, press PRO-DP-F6 to toggle
the display to PROFIBUS-DP I/O. See Figure 6-4.
NOTE: Once you select PROFIBUS-DP, all status and configuration screens
display PROFIBUS-DP I/O information until the end of your TISOFT
session, or until you use the 505IO-F6 toggle to return to Series 505 I/O
configuration.
6-8
545 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1 CONFIG-F2
FIND-F3
EN/DIS-F5 PRO-DP-F6
NOTE: The standard for PROFIBUS-DP I/O (DIN 19245, Part 3) stipulates
certain bus parameters that cannot be changed while communications are
in OPERATE mode. If you modified those bus parameters when you set up
your configuration file in COM PROFIBUS, set communications to STOP
mode before you execute Update, in order to prevent bus errors.
UPDATE IN PROGRESS
545 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1 CONFIG-F2
FIND-F3 MERGE-F4 EN/DIS-F5 505IO-F6 OPR/ST-F7 DELETE-F8
NOTE: In the slave status screen (Figure 6-5), the message UPDATE IN
PROGRESS does not refer to the Update function; rather, the screen is being
continuously refreshed to provide current status information.
5.
FROM PLC
EXIT-F1
SHOW-F2 READDK-F3
READPC-F5
STOP
545 NETDATA PG
EDIT-F7
UPDATE-F8
6-9
STOP
545 NETDATA PG
ABORT-F1
CONT-F6
8.
You are now ready to exit the PROFIBUS-DP Slave Status screen and run
your program.
6-10
6.5
I/O Configuration
Guidelines
For bit or bit-and-word modules (but not for word-only modules), the
number for the I/O address must begin on an eight-point boundary. An
eight-point boundary is (n*8) + 1, (for example, 1, 9, 17, etc.). Addresses
not starting on an eight-point boundary are changed to do so when you
write the values.
Adding or Deleting
Slaves
Modifying an I/O
Address or
Enable/Disable
Status
FROM PLC
EXIT-F1
SHOW-F2 READDK-F3
READPC-F5
STOP
545 NETDATA PG
EDIT-F7
UPDATE-F8
FROM RAM
EXIT-F1
SHOW-F2 READRM-F3
545 NETDATA
EDIT-F7
6-11
The on-line Edit screen gives you the option of reading from and writing to
either the controller or the selected program on disk. See Figure 6-10.
I/O
IDENT MODULE ADDRESS
15 . .
BCD0 . .
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
. . . . . . 32
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
FROM PLC
EXIT-F1
READDK-F3 WRITDK-F4
32
16
16
0
32
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
OPERATE
545 NETDATA PG
READPC-F5 WRITPC-F6 EN/DIS-F7
+
SPACEBAR
FROM PLC
X<>WX-F3 Y<>WY-F4
0 . . ENABLED
0
0
0
0
0
2
4
CMPACT-F5 UNIFY-F6
OPERATE
545 NETDATA PG
RESTOR-F8 +
WARNING
The WRITPC function sends new I/O values immediately to the controller. If
your PROFIBUS-DP communications are in OPERATE mode, modifying your
existing I/O configuration can affect your ongoing process.
Unexpected process operation could cause serious injury or death to
personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Be prepared for the effect on your process, and take any necessary safeguards,
if you choose to write an I/O address value to the controller while your
PROFIBUS-DP communications are in OPERATE rather than STOP mode.
6-12
When you access the off-line Edit screen, you can only read and write the
configuration from the selected program on disk. See Figure 6-11.
I/O
IDENT MODULE ADDRESS
15 . .
BCD0 . .
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
. . . . . . 32
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
32
16
16
0
32
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
FROM RAM
EXIT-F1
FROM RAM
OPERATE
545 NETDATA
EN/DIS-F7
+
READRM-F3 WRITRM-F4
SPACEBAR
X<>WX-F3 Y<>WY-F4
0 . . ENABLED
0
0
0
0
0
2
4
CMPACT-F5 UNIFY-F6
OPERATE
545 NETDATA
RESTOR-F8 +
NOTE: After you change the enable/disable status or I/O address(es) of your
slave(s), for the edit to take effect, you must issue a write command. You can
write to the controller, to the selected program on disk, or to both, on-line.
Off-line, you can write only to RAM.
6-13
6-14
Description
READDK-F3
READRM-F3
WRITDK-F4
WRITRM-F4
READPC-F5
WRITPC-F6
EN/DIS-F7
X<>WX-F3
Toggles the image register type for the selected module between
discrete and word inputs.
Y<>WY-F4
Toggles the image register type for the selected module between
discrete and word outputs.
CMPACT-F5
UNIFY-F6
Moves all modules for the selected slave into the first module. Only
the first address is retained.
RESTOR-F8
6.6
Displaying a
PROFIBUS-DP Slave
Configuration from
RAM
EXIT-F1 CONFIG-F2
SLAVE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ENABLED
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
ASSIGNED
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
545 NETDATA
DELETE-F8
Use the arrow/page keys to highlight the desired slave number on the
screen.
3.
6-15
2.
3.
Use the arrow/page keys to set the SLAVE field, or type in the slave
number.
4.
Press READRM-F3.
The configuration of the selected slave is displayed at the top of the screen,
with the source, FROM RAM, indicated on the prompt line of the display. (See
Figure 6-13.)
I/O
IDENT MODULE ADDRESS
3..
BCD0 . .
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BCD01 . .. 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4..
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
. . . . . . 32
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
. . . . . . 32
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
32
16
16
0
32
0
0
0
16
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
16
0
0
8
0
0
0 . . ENABLED
0
0
0
0
0
2
4
0 . . DISABLED
0
0
16
0
0
2
4
FROM RAM
EXIT-F1
SHOW-F2 READRM-F3
545 NETDATA
EDIT-F7
6-16
Displaying a
Configuration from
Disk or Controller
SLAVE
ENABLED
ASSIGNED
ONLINE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
STOP
UPDATE IN PROGRESS
545 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1 CONFIG-F2
FIND-F3 MERGE-F4 EN/DIS-F5 505IO-F6 OPR/ST-F7 DELETE-F8
2.
Use the arrow/page keys to highlight the desired slave number on the
screen.
3.
4.
6-17
2.
3.
Use the arrow/page keys to set the SLAVE field, or type in the slave
number.
4.
The configuration of the selected slave is displayed at the top of the screen,
with the source, FROM DISK or FROM PLC, indicated on the prompt line of
the display. See Figure 6-15.
I/O
IDENT MODULE ADDRESS
3..
BCD0 . .
4..
BCD0 . .
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
. . . . . . 32
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
. . . . . . 32
....... 0
....... 0
....... 0
32
16
16
0
32
0
0
0
16
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
16
0
0
8
0
0
0 . . ENABLED
0
0
0
0
0
2
4
0 . . DISABLED
0
0
16
0
0
4
8
FROM PLC
EXIT-F1
SHOW-F2 READDK-F3
READPC-F5
545 NETDATA PG
EDIT-F7 UPDATE-F8
6-18
6.7
Showing I/O
Configuration
Chart Display
With the SHOW function, you can display individual I/O points for a slave
configuration, either on- or off-line. You also have the option of displaying
the synonyms for each point. Figure 6-16 illustrates the format of the
display. To use the SHOW function, complete the following steps at the
PROFIBUS-DP Slave Configuration screen. See Figure 6-13 for off-line
mode and Figure 6-15 for on-line mode.
1.
Enter the desired slave number at the top of the PROFIBUS-DP Slave
Configuration screen, and press the appropriate read key.
2.
Use the PgUp/PgDn keys to scroll the display one screen at a time. Use the
up/down arrow keys to scroll the display one row at a time.
MODULE 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X0233 X0234 X0235 X0236 X0237 X0238 X0239 X0240
MODULE 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X0161 X0162 X0163 X0164 X0165 X0166 X0167 X0168
MODULE 2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X0169 X0170 X0171 X0172 X0173 X0174 X0175 X0176
MODULE 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Y0297 Y0298 Y0299 Y0300 Y0301 Y0302 Y0303 Y0304
MODULE 3
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Y0305 Y0306 Y0307 Y0308 Y0309 Y0310 Y0310 Y0311
FROM RAM
555 NETDATA
EXIT-F1 SYNTGL-F2
After pressing SHOW, you can choose to display the synonyms with the
points in a slave. Press SYNTGL-F2 to toggle the synonym display on and
off. With synonyms on, you have up to 12 I/O points and their synonyms
displayed.
6-19
6.8
Finding an I/O
Point
2.
3.
Return
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FIND I/O POINT: X0002
EXIT-F1
ENABLED
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
FOUND AT:
ASSIGNED
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
SLAVE:
ONLINE
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
MODULE: 1
DONE
545 NETDATA PG
NEXT-F2
6-20
If only one (or the last) I/O Point is found, the location (SLAVE and
MODULE) and a DONE message displays.
If more than one I/O Point is found, the location (SLAVE and
MODULE) and a MORE message displays. Press NEXT-F2 to display
the next location.
Chapter 7
Ladder Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7.2
7-3
7.3
Displaying Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6
7.4
7-8
7.5
7-11
7.6
7-12
7.7
7-13
7.8
7-16
7.9
7-17
7.10
7-18
7.11
7-19
7.12
7-21
7.13
7-24
7.14
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-25
7.15
7-26
7-1
7.1
Ladder Programming
Ladder Program
Elements
Although the entire TISOFT Help system is available to you in the edit
mode, you may find the element List display particularly useful for element
names. You can access a display listing the valid entries for a field at any
point that has a prompt requesting an entry. For example, at the prompt for
entering boxes, calling the List display gives a listing of all valid box types.
Figure 7-1 shows the List displayed after selecting BOX in edit mode.
Invoke the List display by pressing \ or SHIFT ? . Use arrow keys (or
PgUp/PgDn, Home, End) to select a box instruction from the menu. The
following function keys are available.
HELP-F4 Accesses the Help System and gives you a definition for the
element where the cursor is currently positioned.
X2
Y17
EXIT-F1
LIST
BOX
ABSV
ADD
BITC
BITP
BITS
CBD
CDB
CMP
CTR
DCAT
MORE
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
545 NETDATA
SELECT-F8
HELP-F4
7-2
7.2
TISOFT functions are accessible through the menu keys available after the
selection of on- or off-line. Figure 7-2 shows the ladder display that appears
off-line. The ladder display is the access point to the TISOFT functions.
Whenever the plus (+) sign is visible at the end of a function key line, press
the spacebar to display the remaining function keys.
Since you communicate with the controller in on-line mode, the menu keys
for on-line include those functions that operate only with the controller. See
Appendix A for a mapping of function key menus.
Entering/Editing
Programs
1
NOP
2
NOP
3
NOP
4
NOP
5
NOP
6
NOP
7
EXIT-F1
EDIT-F2
FIND-F3 DOCUM-F4
545 NETDATA
BLOCK-F5 REPLAC-F6 BLDCHT-F7 WRITDK-F8 +
WARNING
TISOFT allows program entry and modification while the controller is in RUN
mode. However, entries made to the program in RUN mode may immediately
affect the execution of the program.
Failure to follow appropriate safety precautions could result in death or serious
injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Only qualified personnel authorized to perform system level operations should
enter or modify a program with the controller in RUN mode.
7-3
Some of the 545, 555, and 575 controllers have a RUN-TIME EDIT (ED)
mode in addition to PROGRAM (PG) and RUN (RN) modes. RUN-TIME
EDIT mode allows the editing of your RLL program while the process is
running. Returning to RUN mode updates the program in the
programmable controller to reflect the modifications made during
RUN-TIME EDIT. See Figure 7-3 for a typical task flow.
Before returning to RUN mode from RUN-TIME EDIT, always press
SYNTAX-F8 to check the syntax of the RLL program. Syntax check looks for
invalid instructions that could cause the process to go to PROGRAM mode.
!
WARNING
TISOFT allows program entry and modification while the controller is in RUN
mode. If your controller supports RUN-TIME EDIT mode and Syntax Check,
always check the syntax of the modifications (using SYNTAX-F8) before
returning to RUN mode. If your controller does not support Syntax Check,
remember that all entries made to the program in RUN mode immediately affect
the execution of the program.
Failure to follow appropriate safety precautions could result in death or serious
injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Only qualified personnel authorized to perform system level operations should
enter or modify a program with the controller in RUN mode.
7-4
Figure 7-4 shows the basic steps in going to RUN-TIME EDIT mode and
returning to RUN mode. Refer also to Section 11.13 for discussion of setting
controller operating mode.
X12
C113
Y2
X2
X3
Y6
ENTER-F8
EXIT-F1
ED
LADDERS = EDIT
LOOPS = RUN LOOP MODE
LOCKED TO FOLLOW LADDER MODE
PRESS SYNTAX TO VERIFY PROGRAM CHANGES BEFORE SELECTING RUN
545 NETDATA ED
RUN-F4
OPR/ST-F6
SYNTAX-F8
Check Syntax.
Activate Program
Changes in PLC.
7-5
7.3
Displaying Networks
Displaying
Networks
C1
C2
C3
C4
X1
X2
X3
X7
X9
WY17.8
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11 C
1
V100 +205
= INT
X5 WX100.5
Y1
28
34
NOP
NOP
35
NOP
36
545 LOADER1
EXIT-F1 EDIT-F2 FIND-F3 DOCUM-F4 BLOCK-F5 REPLAC-F6 BLDCHT-F7 WRITDK-F8 +
The top line of the ladder display tells you the location of the cursor by
network block row, network block column, network address, and L-memory
words available (off-line only). In Figure 7-5, the cursor is positioned in
Row 2, Column 6, at Address 1. To toggle the cursor position display on/off,
press Ctrl T.
Status Line
Information
The fields on the status line at the bottom right of the display provide you
with information as listed below.
Controller type
On-line, the third field shows PG, ED, or RN mode. The absence of PG,
ED, or RN indicates offline.
In the display shown above, the status line shows that the controller is a
545 and the program name is LOADER1. Absence of PG, RN, or ED
indicates that the programming device is offline.
7-6
The keys listed in Table 7-1 enable you to move through the program
display. These keys are also available in other areas of TISOFT, such as
block, ladder status, status edit, and replace, unless they were previously
defined for another function.
Table 7-1 Cursor and Editing Keys
Key
Function
HOME
END
Up/Down Arrows
Right/Left Arrows
PgUp, PgDn
RETURN
Ctrl T
7-7
7.4
Getting into
Edit Mode
To enter or edit a ladder logic program, first press EDIT-F2 to enter edit
mode. Figure 7-6 shows the ladder screen in edit mode.
ROW: 1 COL: 1 NETWORK STARTING ADDRESS: 1
NOP
1
NOP
2
NOP
3
NOP
4
NOP
5
NOP
6
EXIT-F1
| |-F2
|/|-F3
( )-F4
( / )-F5
BOX-F6
545 LOADER1
-|R|-(I)-F7
SPACEBAR
HORZ-F1
545 LOADER1
7-8
The first string of function keys provides the basic elements of a ladder
programcontacts, coils, and box instructions.
You can use the INSERT-F8 (or INS key) to insert networks or elements
between existing networks or elements. Refer to Section 7.7 for details
on using this function.
Entering Contacts
2.
3.
Type in the element identifier. (For a list of valid element types, press
\ or Shift ? .) You can also use the hard keys (for example X, Y, C) to
enter a normally open contact directly.
4.
Press Return to write the contact to the network. The editing cursor
moves to the next available position.
Rung 1 after pressing | |-F2:
C000000001
NOP
To enter a relational contact, position the cursor where you want the contact
to appear and follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to each field, including the INT
field, which you can change to UINT (unsigned integer). You can also
change the relation of the contact when INT or UINT is highlighted
by typing one of the other sign keys (for example, >, < <>, >=, or <=).
4.
Enter the identifiers for each field and press Return to write the contact
to the network. The editing cursor moves to the next available position.
Rung 1 after pressing -|R|-(I)-F7 followed by = -F2:
V0000001
V1
1
= INT
NOP
7-9
To enter or edit a coil, position the cursor on the network. Use the coil
function key or press the O hard key to position the cursor in the output
column and make the entry. Type in the element identifier.
If you decide not to complete an entry, press ABORT-F1. Press Return to write
the coil to the network. When a network is complete, press ENTER-F8.
Entering Boxes
To enter or edit a box, position the cursor in the column of the rung where
the box is to be created. Press BOX-F6. Type in the mnemonic for the box, or
press \ or Shift ? to show a listing of valid box types, then place the
cursor on the box type you want and press SELECT-F8 or Return . The selected
box type appears in the prompt. Press Return again. When the box is
displayed, type in the parameters. Use the arrow keys to move from field to
field in the box.
If you decide not to complete an entry, press ABORT-F1. After completing
the entry, press Return to write the box to the network. When a network is
complete, press ENTER-F8.
Box Locations
Figure 7-9 shows locations for multiple-input and large boxes. As shown
below, you can have no more than two contacts per input rung to the
multiple-input and large boxes.
X1
X2
Y17
Small
Multiple-Input
Box
C7
C8
Large Box
All multiple input and
large boxes must start
at this position.
ABORT-F1
| |-F2
|/|-F3
( )-F4
(/)-F5
545 NETDATA
BOXF6 -|R|-(I)-F7
ENTER-F8 +
7-10
You can correct entries by using Back Space to delete previous characters, or
you can keep typing until the field overflows and resets.
7.5
Press EDIT-F2.
2.
Press the INS hard key, or press the SPACEBAR, then press INSERT-F8.
You receive the function key display shown in Figure 7-10.
545 LOADER1
EXIT-F1 ROW-F2 COL-F3 INSMOD-F4 RUNG-F5 AUTORN-F6
X9
WY17.8
Y1
28
7-11
7.6
Use HORZ-F1 (or the H hard key) and VERT-F2 (or the J hard key) to add
the connecting lines when you are entering a complex network. You cannot
draw a horizontal line in the last column of a row. With the vertical line key,
you cannot draw a line from the first column, on the last row, or on the top
of a box.
Drawing Horizontal
Lines
Use HORZ-F1 (or the H hard key) for drawing horizontal lines. Figure 7-12
shows positioning of the cursor before and after the line is drawn.
Line Drawn
To draw a vertical line down to the left of the cursor, press VERT-F2 (or the J
hard key). To draw a vertical line up to the left of the cursor, press U.
Figure 7-13 shows positioning of the cursor to draw the line down from the
cursor.
7-12
7.7
Editing Programs
Saving Edits
Inserting Rungs
You can either insert a single empty rung in your program or you can
auto-insert to save time when adding several networks. Figure 7-14
illustrates the positioning of inserted networks.
To insert an empty rung in a display, press either the INS hardkey or
INSERT-F8, then RUNG-F5, in the insert mode function keys.
To insert more than one empty rung, press either the INS hardkey or
INSERT-F8, then AUTORN-F6 in the insert mode function keys
(Figure 7-10).
X22
C60
X70
C100
46
48
Rung after INSERT: (Previous rung moved down, and new address will be
assigned after editing new rung and pressing ENTER-F8.)
46
X22
C60
46
7-13
62
C60
X22
X22
62
Cursor
7-14
To delete lines and elements from your ladder program, use the HORZD-F3,
N, DEL, or Backspace for horizontal lines, and VERTD-F4 or M keys for
vertical lines on the edit function key line. Figure 7-17 and Figure 7-18
illustrate horizontal and vertical line deletes.
Using UNDEL to
Duplicate Elements
7-15
7.8
To access the Unique function, complete the steps below from the edit
function with your cursor positioned on the element you wish to check.
1.
Press SPACEBAR.
2.
Press UNIQUE-F6.
After the check is complete, you receive one of the following messages about
the element you selected.
7-16
7.9
Valid Element
Types
Creating an
Element Usage
Listing
To show if specific elements are used in your program, you can build an
element usage listing. The following element types can be shown in the
Ladder Element Usage Table.
X
WX
TC
SHR
WY
STW
DRM
MWT
OS
To create an element usage listing, press Ctrl U. Type in the desired starting
address at the prompt, and press Return . Figure 7-19 shows an example table.
ROW: 1 COL: 1 NETWORK STARTING ADDRESS: 1
X1
X2
Y21
1
X5
Y22
X7
C7
6
LADDER ELEMENT USAGE TABLE
8
X000000
X000010
9 X000020
X000030
X000040
10
X000050
X000060
11 X000070
9876543210
..*.*..**
..........
..........
..........
.*....**..
..........
..........
..........
X000080
X000090
X000100
X000110
X000120
X000130
X000140
X000150
9876543210
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
..........
NOP
X000160
X000170
X000180
X000190
X000200
X000210
X000220
X000230
9876543210
..........
NOP
..........
..........
..........
NOP
..........
..........
..........
NOP
..........
545 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1
FIND-F2
Elements are shown on the display in increments of 10 (C0, C10, C20, etc.).
Usage of the points between is shown in the adjacent column from 0
through 9 (C1 under 1, C2 under 2 etc.). You receive a display showing use
of the selected elements according to the following legend.
Blank
Dot (.)
Asterisk (*)
Dash ()
7-17
7.10
Accessing the
Documentation
Editors
Documenting Your
Program
7-18
7.11
Find Functions
The Find operation enables you to locate any ladder address or element type
(word or bit-of-word) in your ladder program.
Using Find
Operation
FIND: WY101.9
BIT ONLY
EXIT-F1
NOP-F3 NXTIN-F4
ADDR-F2
OUTPUT ONLY
545 LOADER1 PG
WDBTGL-F7 OUTTGL-F8
ADDR-F2 allows you to select the address for a rung of ladder logic as
the element type you want to find.
If you are unsure of a box number, type in the box type and a zero for the
identifier. Then press Return . This finds the next occurrence of that box
element type.
7-19
To determine valid entries for the Find operation, you can access a List
display by pressing \ or SHIFT ? at the prompt line. The List display lists
the valid entries for that particular field. Figure 7-21 shows the List display
available at the FIND prompt.
ROW: 1 COL: 1 NETWORK STARTING ADDRESS: 1
X1
Y21
X2
LIST
X5
4
X7
6
10
ELEMENT
X
Y
C
V
K
WX
WY
STW
B
W
MORE
COIL
END
ENDC
GTS
JMP
JMPE
LBL
MCR
MCRE
RTN
SBR
MORE
BOX
ABSV
ADD
BITC
BITP
BITS
CBD
CDB
CMP
CTR
DCAT
MORE
Y22
LOOP
LACK
LADB
LCFH
LCFL
LERR
LHA
LHHA
LKC
LKD
LLA
MORE
ALARM
AACK
AADB
ACFH
ACFL
AERR
AHA
AHHA
ALA
ALLA
AODA
MORE
MISC.
OUTC
OUTY
NEXT
NXTIN
L
ADDR
DSP
DSC
DCP
DCC
MORE
C7
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
11
EXIT-F1
545 NETDATA
SELECT-F8
HELP-F4
Table 7-2 shows examples of Find operations and the corresponding field
settings.
Table 7-2 Find Examples
Sample FIND Operation
Type Field
Word/Bit Field
Output Field
V2
V2
Word Only
V2.7
V2
Bit Only
V2
Bit Only
Output Only
TMR4
TMRS0
TC0
Timer 4 box
7-20
7.12
Reading/Altering
V- and K-Memory
Contents
With the V/K memory editor, you can display, read, and write V- or
K-memory addresses in the format you select. To help in determining
program function of the addresses, you can display the memory locations
with synonyms listed as well.
To access the V/K memory editor, press Ctrl V or Ctrl K from any display in
TISOFT.
The memory table you selected (V or K) is then displayed. Forty consecutive
memory locations are listed in the table with the value given for each
location. The format of the value is also shown. The default format for all
locations is integer.
Displaying Memory
Values
After accessing the V/K memory table, complete the steps below to display a
specific memory location.
1.
Press FIND-F2.
2.
3.
Press
Return
The display is changed to show the V or K address you requested as the first
entry in the table, along with 39 consecutive entries following the requested
location.
Displaying
Synonyms
First, locate the address by using the steps above. Then, complete the
following steps to display synonyms with a particular location.
1.
Using the Return or arrow keys, position the cursor on the desired
address in the memory table.
2.
Press SYNTGL-F5.
The address, synonym, and descriptor you requested are displayed, along
with the next three locations.
Reading Values
Complete the following steps to read the current values on your display.
Begin the steps at the V/K memory table.
1.
Press READ-F7.
The current values of the locations on the screen are read and displayed.
Any values you have modified on the screen, but have not written, are reset
to their original value.
7-21
WARNING
Changing Memory
Values
Press FIND-F2.
2.
3.
Press
4.
Using the Return or arrow keys, position the cursor on the desired
address in the new table display.
5.
Return
After completing inputs on the display, press WRITE-F8 to save the changes
you made to the values.
Saving a Numeric
Display Format
7-22
Before making any numeric format changes that you want to save, verify
with FMTGL-F6 that FMT: ON is displayed on the lower right of the screen.
The format must be on before format changes are made if they are to be
saved.
Changing Numeric
Format
Press FIND-F2.
2.
3.
Press
4.
Press SPACEBAR.
5.
Return
HEX-F1
BIN-F2
INT-F3
+/ -F4
6.
DOUBLE-F5
REAL-F6
TMR.1S-F7
TMR1MS-F8
Press SPACEBAR.
After completing inputs on the display, press WRITE-F8 to save the changes
you made to the formats. You do not have to write the changes after each
entry on a display.
Entering Message
Strings
ABORT-F1
7-23
7.13
Accessing
Onscreen
Cross-Reference
X22
C60
TMR6
X22
C61
P= 0005.0
C60
C61
SFPGM6
C61
C60
7( )
7] [
545 NETDATA
EXIT-F1
Reading the
Display
7-24
7.14
Zoom
If your controller has S-memory, you can use zoom to display and/or edit SF
programs or subroutines. To do this, place the cursor on the SFPGM or
SFSUB box in ladders. Press Ctrl O. To return to the ladder display, press
EXIT-F1.
7-25
7.15
7-26
Action
Alt R
Alt S
Alt P
Alt L
Alt W
Alt O
Chapter 8
8-2
8.2
8-3
8.3
Displaying Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
8.4
Editing Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8
8.5
8-10
8.6
8-12
8.7
8-13
8.8
8-14
8.9
8-16
8.10
8-20
8.11
Editing SF Programs/Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-22
8.12
8-26
8.13
8-28
8.14
8-30
8.15
Compiling SF Programs/Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-31
8-1
8.1
Using TISOFT in
S-Memory
The area of controller memory reserved for loops, analog alarms, and SF
programs/subroutines is designated as S-memory. You must have S-memory
configured before you can access the menus for loops, alarms, and SF
programs/subroutines. (Chapter 4 provides details on configuring memory.)
Display and edit loops, analog alarms, and special function programs or
subroutines with the S-memory menus, which are grouped for access by
type of operation. Each operation has a separate directory; e.g., loops,
alarms, and special function programs/subroutines.
Figure 8-1 illustrates the key sequence to reach the S-memory directories.
EXIT
EDIT
EXIT
HINTS
FIND
DOCUM
ONLINE
BLOCK
AUX
COLOR
STATUS
PGMS
OFFLINE
CHART
SPACEBAR (+)
EXIT
EDIT
FIND
LOOP
ALARM
SFPGM
DOCUM
BLOCK
LOOP
ALARM
SFPGM
8-2
8.2
Directory
Information
D indicates Disabled,
Blank indicates Enabled.
SELECT: LOOP0004
EXIT-F1 SHOW-F2 BLOCK-F3 EN/DIS-F4
565 NETDATA
R/S-F6 ALARM-F7 SFPGM-F8
D 1 PALLET 5
D 2 PALLET 6
C D 3 PALLET 7
4 PALLET 8
Indicates
D 5 PALLET 9
Enable/Disable
C indicates Compiled,
Blank indicates Not Compiled.
Press SFSUB-F8 to move
selection cursor to the
SF Subroutine directory.
SELECT: SFPGM0001
EXIT-F1 SHOW-F2 BLOCK-F3 DIS/CP-F4 PG/RN-F5
575 NETDATA PG
LOOP-F6 ALARM-F7 SFSUB-F8
8-3
Each directory lists S-memory available in bytes. When you make a change
to S-memory, either by adding to or deleting from your program, S-memory
available is updated.
S-memory available is also shown at the prompt line location (bottom left of
the screen) of the Show screen and the Edit screen of a loop, alarm, or
SF program/subroutine.
Common
Function Keys
S-memory functions for loops, alarms, and special function programs are
initiated with a set of keys common to each directory. For example, after
invoking the directory for loops, analog alarms, or special function
programs, the keys listed in Table 8-1 are common to each.
Table 8-1 S-Memory Function Keys
Function
Description
EXIT-F1
SHOW-F2
BLOCK-F3
EN/DIS-F4
DIS/CP-F4
PG/RN-F5
LOOP-F6
R/S-F6
ALARM-F7
SFPGM-F8
SFSUB-F8
8-4
Return
Arrow Keys
Locating Directory
Entries
Use the arrow keys to position the cursor on any entry in the directory;
then press the function key for the operation you wish to perform on
the selection. For example, position the cursor on Loop 6 and press
SHOW-F2 to display Loop 6.
8-5
8.3
Displaying Loops
Displaying the
Loop Table
8-6
To invoke the Loop Directory, complete the steps below. If you are at the
Ladder Display screen, begin with Step 2.
1.
2.
3.
Press LOOP-F6.
To display the Loop Table for a particular loop, complete the steps below
from the Loop Directory. Figure 8-4 shows the format of the table and the
functions available.
1.
At the prompt, enter the loop number (1-64) you want to program, or
move the cursor with the arrow keys to select the loop you want.
2.
Press SHOW-F2.
3.
As shown in Figure 8-4, only part of the Loop Table can be shown on
one screen. Press PgDn to see the remainder of the table.
PID LOOP 64
TITLE:
PV IS BIPOLAR: NO
SQUARE ROOT OF PV: NO
20% OFFSET ON PV: YES
LOCK SETPOINT: NO
LOCK AUTO/MANUAL: NO
LOCK CASCADE: NO
RAMP/SOAK PROGRAMMED: NO
RAMP/SOAK FOR SP: NO
ENABLED
565 NETDATA
COMMNT-F7 EN/DIS-F8
EDIT-F2
Page
Down
Page
Up
NO
NO
+0.00000
+0.00000
+100.000
+100.000
MONITOR DEVIATION: NO
DEVIATION ALARM: YELLOW = +100.000
ORANGE = +100.000
MONITOR RATE OF CHANGE: NO
RATE OF CHANGE ALARM: +0.00000
MONITOR BROKEN XMITTER: NO
+1.00000
+INF
+0.00000
NO
ENABLED
565 NETDATA
COMMNT-F7 EN/DIS-F8
EDIT-F2
8-7
8.4
Editing Loops
Showing Loops
Display loops by completing the following steps from the Start-up Screen. If
you are in an S-memory directory, begin at Step 4.
1.
2.
3.
Press LOOP-F6.
4.
5.
Press SHOW-F2.
To edit a loop, use the Show function from the Loop Directory to display the
Loop Table. Then press EDIT-F2.
Making Entries to
the Loop Table
Use the arrow keys or Return to position the cursor in each of the fields in the
Loop Table. Then complete the fields in the Loop Table by using the function
keys or by typing in the element address or value required for each field.
For example, if you want the RAMP/SOAK FOR SP field to read YES, either
press YES-F2 or type in Y. Numeric entries, such as sample rate, must be
typed in with the hard keys. (Remember there is more than one screen of
loop data. Press PgDn to see the remainder of the table.)
When you have completed entry of your loop data, press ENTER-F8 to save
the Loop Table.
All entries in the Loop Table are verified after you press Enter. If invalid
entries are detected, the field cursor is placed on the invalid field and an
error message is displayed. If no errors are detected, the loop is saved, and
the display is returned to the Loop Directory.
8-8
Status of Control
Blocks during Edits
When you show or edit a particular loop, the control block enabled/disabled
status remains constant. However, when you press ENTER-F8, the control
block is automatically disabled to enter your edit. The control block is
restored to its original status, enabled or disabled, upon exit to the directory.
You can also enable the Loop control block by using the EN/DIS function
key while in the Loop Directory or Loop display.
Deleting Loops
To delete a loop, use the Block functions from the Directory. While in the
Loop Directory, access the Block functions by completing the following steps.
1.
Press BLOCK-F3.
2.
Press DELETE-F4.
3.
When the prompt appears, enter the range of the loop(s) that you want
deleted, and press Return .
8-9
8.5
Displaying
Ramp/Soak Table
To enter ramp/soak steps, display the entry table by completing the steps
below from the Start-up Screen. From the Loop Directory, begin at Step 4.
Figure 8-5 shows the Ramp/Soak Table. The table provides S-memory
available and gives status, enabled or disabled, of the loop control block to
which the ramp/soak steps are tied.
Your loop must already exist before you enter ramp/soak steps; otherwise,
you cannot access the Ramp/Soak Table. Be sure that you have entered YES
in the RAMP/SOAK FOR SP field of the loop programming table for which
you are creating ramp/soak steps. If you do not, the Ramp/Soak Table will
not be executed in the controller. TISOFT will give a message to remind you
that the field is not set.
1.
2.
3.
Press LOOP-F6.
4.
Type in the desired loop number at the prompt or move the cursor to
select the loop you want.
5.
Press R/S-F6.
PID LOOP 4
R/S
EXIT-F1 EDIT-F2
STATUS
BIT
SETPOINT
RAMP/RATE
(UNITS)
(UNITS/MIN)
SOAK TIME
(MIN)
DEADBAND
(UNITS)
ENABLED
565 NETDATA
EN/DIS-F8
WRITE-F4
8-10
Entering
Ramp/Soak Flag
Address
To enter a flag address for a ramp/soak table, press EDIT-F2. Enter the
memory type of the flag (access the pop-up list by pressing \ or Shift ? ,
or type the memory type), then type in the identifier, and press ENTER-F8.
If you do not wish to program an R/S flag, type in NONE at the address
field.
Making Entries to
Ramp/Soak Table
To program a Ramp/Soak Table, complete the following steps. Use the arrow
keys or Return to move the cursor from field to field within a step. Use
DELLN-F6 or INSLN-F7 to delete or insert lines.
1.
Press
2.
If a table already exists and you just need to modify it, press EDIT-F2.
3.
In the R/S field, type in R for ramp, S for soak, or E for an end step.
(Or, press the equivalent function key.)
4.
The STATUS BIT field is optional. If you wish to designate a status bit
for a step, type in a Y or C element type and identifier, or NONE-F2.
5.
If you selected a ramp step, type in the desired values for SETPOINT
and RAMP RATE.
Return
If you selected a soak step, type in the desired values for SOAK TIME
and DEADBAND.
6.
Press ENTER-F8.
7.
Press
8.
Repeat steps 3. through 7. until you have entered all ramp/soak steps.
9.
Return
8-11
8.6
To display the Alarm Directory, press ALARM-F7 from the Ladder Display.
Displaying the
Alarm Table
To display the Alarm Table, complete the following steps from the Analog
Alarm Directory. Figure 8-6 shows the format of the table and the functions
available.
1.
At the SELECT prompt, enter the alarm number (1-128) you want to
program, or move the cursor to select the alarm you want.
2.
Press SHOW-F2.
TITLE:
NO
NONE
+0.00000
+0.00000
SPECIAL FUNCTION: NO
PV IS BIPOLAR: NO
SQUARE ROOT OF PV: NO
20% OFFSET ON PV: YES
ALARM DEADBAND: +0.00000
MONITOR LOW-LOW/HI-HI:
MONITOR LOW/HIGH:
PV ALARMS: LOW-LOW=
LOW=
HIGH=
HIGH-HIGH=
NO
NO
+0.00000
+0.00000
+100.000
+100.000
MONITOR DEVIATION: NO
DEVIATION ALARM: YELLOW= +100.000
ORANGE= +100.000
MONITOR RATE OF CHANGE: NO
RATE OF CHANGE ALARM: +0.00000
MONITOR BROKEN XMITTER: NO
ENABLED
565 NETDATA
COMMNT-F7 EN/DIS-F8
EXIT-F1 EDIT-F2
8-12
8.7
To edit an alarm, use the Show function from the Alarm Directory to display
the Alarm Table. Then press EDIT-F2. Use the arrow and Return to position
the cursor on the field you wish to change.
Making Entries to
the Alarm Table
Complete the fields in the Alarm Table by using the function keys available
as you move the cursor onto each field, or you can type in the element
address or value required for each field. Position the cursor in the fields
with the arrow or Return . When you have completed entry of your alarm data,
press ENTER-F8 to save the Alarm Table.
All entries in the alarm table are verified after you press ENTER. If invalid
entries are detected, the field cursor is placed on the invalid field and an
error message is displayed. If no errors are detected, the display is returned
to the Alarm Directory.
Status of Control
Blocks during Edits
When you show or edit a particular alarm, the control block enabled/
disabled status remains constant. However, when you press ENTER-F8, the
control block is automatically disabled to enter your edit. The control block
is restored to its original status, enabled or disabled, upon exit to the
directory.
You can also enable the control block after edit by using the EN/DIS
function key while in the Alarm Directory or the Alarm display.
Deleting Alarms
To delete an alarm, use the Block functions from the Directory. While in the
Alarm Directory, complete the following steps.
1.
Press BLOCK-F3.
2.
Press DELETE-F4.
3.
When the prompt appears, enter the range of the alarms that you want
deleted, and press Return .
For details on using the Block functions, see Chapter 13 of this manual.
8-13
8.8
Special Function
Language
Special Function
Statements
Special Function
Instructions
SF Programming
Elements
8-14
An SF instruction
A set of parameters
See the SF Instructions and Parameters section that follows for a listing of
the Special Function instructions and parameters. In addition to decimal
format, constants can also be displayed in either hexadecimal or binary
format in math expressions.
To enter a hexadecimal constant, precede the hex value with 0H; e.g.,
0H7FFE, 0H3F.
To enter a binary constant, precede the binary value with 0B; e.g.,
0B1011100101110001, 0B01100111.
Using Expressions
Assignment (:=)
The operators listed above are available for integer/real math expressions;
for example, MATH and IF statements, integer/real parameter fields.
In non-PowerMath controllers, IMATH statements and integer-only
parameter fields do not support the Exponentiation, Relational, AND/OR
operators, or functions. (Refer also to Table 8-2.)
In PowerMath controllers, IMATH statements, IIF statements, and
integer-only parameter fields support all expression operators except
exponentiation (**); PowerMath also supports the absolute value (ABS)
function. (Refer also to Table 8-2.)
8-15
8.9
Program Headers
The following list gives the parameters for the SF program header and
SFSUB header.
Header
Field(s)
Parameters
SFPGM HEADER
TITLE
CONTINUE ON ERROR
ERROR STATUS ADDR
PROGRAM TYPE
CYCLE TIME (SEC)
TITLE
SFSUB HEADER
SF Instructions
Instruction
Field(s)
Any free format text up to 1021 characters in length, with each line having
66 characters.
BCDBIN
BCD INPUT
BINARY RESULT
BINBCD
BINARY INPUT
BCD RESULT
CALL
SFSUB
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
CDT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT TABLE
OUTPUT TABLE
TABLE LENGTH
ELSE
No parameters
ENDIF
No parameters
EXIT
ERRCODE
8-16
Parameters
Instruction
Field(s)
Parameters
FTSR-IN
INPUT
REGISTER START
REGISTER LENGTH
STATUS BIT
FTSR-OUT
REGISTER START
OUTPUT
REGISTER LENGTH
STATUS BIT
GOTO
LABEL
IF
Free format math expression using integer or real Elements and Constants.
May be up to 74 tokens (the smallest indivisible unit, such as an operator, or
constant) in length. All Operators and Functions are valid. Assignment
operator ( := ) is optional.
IIF
Free format math expression using integer Elements and Constants. May be up
to 74 tokens (the smallest indivisible unit, such as an operator, or constant) in
length. All Operators except exponentiation (**) are valid. Only ABS function is
supported. Assignment operator ( := ) is optional. (PowerMath only)
IMATH
Free format math expression using only integer Elements and Constants.
May be up to 74 tokens in length. Operators not supported:
** = < > < <= > >= AND OR MATH/IF Functions are not supported.
In PowerMath, all Operators except exponentiation (**) are valid; only ABS
function is supported. Assignment operator ( := ) is required.
LABEL
LABEL
LEAD/LAG
INPUT
OUTPUT
LEAD TIME (MIN)
Free format math expression using integer or real Elements and Constants.
May be up to 74 tokens (the smalled indivisible unit, such as an operator, or
constant) in length. All Operators and Functions are valid. Assignment
operator ( := ) is required.
8-17
Field(s)
Parameters
PACK
TO/FROM TABLE
TABLE ADDRESS
T or F
(Int) Element or Addr. Expression. If TO table,
cannot be READ ONLY. TABLE ADDR +
(TOTAL NO. OF POINTS 1) must be
within configured memory range.
(Int) Constant (greater than zero), Element,
or Value or Address Expression.
DATA START ADDR + (NO. OF POINTS 1)
must be within configured memory range.
NO. OF POINTS
Can have up to 20 pairs of
NO. OF POINTS and
DATA START ADDR
parameters
PACKAA
TO/FROM TABLE
TABLE ADDRESS
T or F
(Int) Element or Addr. Expression. If TO table,
cannot be READ ONLY.
(Int) Constant (range: 1 max Alarm),
Element, or Value or Address Expression
(Int/Real) From 1 to 8 Alarm data types
may be listed. No ID number. If FROM
table, cannot be READ ONLY.
ALARM NUMBER
PARAMETERS
PACKLOOP
TO/FROM TABLE
TABLE ADDRESS
LOOP NUMBER
PARAMETERS
PACKRS
TO/FROM TABLE
TABLE ADDRESS
LOOP NUMBER
NUMBER OF STEPS
STARTING STEP
PETWD
8-18
No parameters
T or F
(Int) Element or Addr. Expression. If TO table,
cannot be READ ONLY.
(Int) Constant (range: 1 - max Loop),
Element, or Value or Address Expression
(Int/Real) From 1 to 8 Loop data types
may be listed. No ID number. If FROM
table, cannot be READ ONLY.
T or F
(Int) Element or Addr. Expression. If TO table,
cannot be READ ONLY.
(Int) Constant (range: 1 - max Loop),
Element, or Value or Address Expression
(Int) Constant (range: 1 - 256), Element, or
Value or Address Expression
TABLE ADDR + (No. of Steps * 6) 1
must be within configured memory range.
(Int) Constant (range: 1 - 256), Element, or
Value or Address Expression
(PowerMath only)
Instruction
Field(s)
Parameters
PORT
MESSAGE
RETURN
No parameters
SCALE
BINARY INPUT
SCALED RESULT
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
20% OFFSET
BIPOLAR
SDT
INPUT TABLE
OUTPUT
TABLE PTR
TABLE LENGTH
RESTART BIT
SSR
REGISTER START
STATUS BIT
REGISTER LENGTH
UNSCALE
SCALED INPUT
BINARY RESULT
LOW LIMIT
HIGH LIMIT
20% OFFSET
BIPOLAR
8-19
8.10
Invoking the
SF Directory
Displaying the
SF Table
2.
3.
Press SFPGM-F8.
2.
Press SHOW-F2.
TITLE:
SF PROGRAM
FIND-F4
DISABLED
565 NETDATA
DELST-F5 INSST-F6 COMMNT-F7 EN/DIS-F8
8-20
Finding SF
Statements
After you have displayed a program or subroutine with the Show function,
use the Find operation to locate a particular statement or element within
your program for display. Complete the following steps to find a specific
statement or element.
1.
Press FIND-F4.
2.
Use one of the following function keys to select the type of Find to be
performed.
Press STMTNO-F2 to enter a statement number.
or
Press INSTR-F3 to enter an SF instruction name.
or
Press ELEMNT-F4 to enter an element address within an SF statement.
Finding Start/End of
a Program
3.
4.
Press
Return
To find the end of the program, press INSTR-F3; type in END at the
prompt and press Return .
8-21
8.11
Editing SF Programs/Subroutines
SF INSTRUCTIONS:
MATH/IF FUNCTIONS:
ELEMENTS:
(REAL)
(INT/REAL)
*
FTSR-OUT
ABS
FRAC
APVH +* K
P
+V
+T
BINBCD
PRINT
ARCCOS LN
APVL
BCDBIN
CALL
ARCSIN LOG
ARCA
* WX
LADB
SCALE
PACK
ARCTAN ROUND
ATS
WY
* LERR
UNSCALE LEAD/LAG
CEIL
SIN
LKC
AADB LHA
MATH
RETURN
COS
SQRT
LKD
* AERR LHHA
IMATH
PACKLOOP EXP
TAN
LPVH
AHA
LLA
IF
PACKAA
FLOOR
TRUNC
LPVL
AHHA LLLA
ELSE
PACKRS
LRCA
ALA
LMN
ENDIF
GOTO
LTD
ALLA
LMX
SDT
LABEL
PRINT OPTIONS:
LTI
AODA LODA
CDT
EXIT
%NNN
:TIME
LTS
APV
LPV
SSR
IIF
<FF>
:DATE
ASP
LSP
FTSR-IN PETWD
* (READ ONLY)
ASPH LSPH
+ (LONG/UNSIGNED)
ASPL LSPL
EXPRESSION OPERATORS:
AYDA LYDA
+ VMS + VMM
( ) ( : : ) NOT * / MOD + << >> & | ^ :=
+G
AND OR = <> < <= > >=
NOT VALID IN IMATH/IIF: **
HEX CONSTANT: 0H7FFF
BINARY CONSTANT: 0B01011010
(INTEGER)
DCP AACK
DSC ACF
DSP ACFH
* STW ACFL
* TCC AVF
TCP
LACK
C
LCF
*X
LCFH
Y
LCFL
SFEC LVF
LRSF LRSN
EXIT-F1
8-22
Status of Control
Blocks during Edits
PowerMath
Functional Support
PowerMath Controllers
SFPGM and SFSUB boxes cannot be set SFPGM and SFSUB boxes can be set
for IN-LINE execution.
for IN-LINE execution.
8-23
Complete the title and header information by using the arrow and Return
keys to move the cursor through the fields. For a subroutine, you have a
title field only. The length of the fields is the size of the highlighted cursor
on the field.
If you do not make entries to the header fields, the following default values
are assumed.
Entering SF
Statements
Title: None
Continue on Error: No
From the SF header title field, begin entry of statements by pressing the
down arrow to position the cursor in the statement field. Type in the
instruction name, and press Return . Use the alphanumeric keys to complete
the parameter prompts for the SF instruction you requested. Move the
cursor from prompt to prompt with Return or the arrow keys.
The following keys are available for editing:
Delete: Press DEL to delete a single character. Use with the cursor at
the end of a line to delete the RETURN and append the following line
by filling the line at the cursor position.
Insert: Press INS to invoke the insert mode. Add a return after the
insert to split a line at any point and move the text after the RETURN
to the following line. Toggle off the insert mode by pressing INS again.
Parameter entries are verified individually each time you move the cursor
off a parameter. Verify each statement at completion by pressing ENTER-F8.
If no errors are found, the statement is saved. If errors exist, you receive a
message, and the cursor is positioned on the parameter containing the error.
8-24
BCDBIN
IMATH
UNSCALE
FTSR-OUT
IF
IIF
Press BLOCK-F3.
2.
Press DELETE-F4.
3.
8-25
8.12
Accessing the
Documentation
Editors
Invoking the
Synonym Editor
Invoking Comment
Screen
2.
Press SHOW-F2.
3.
Press COMMNT-F7. Figure 8-9 shows the comment display for Show or
Edit.
or
8-26
1.
2.
LOOP 10
PAGING: NONE
ABORT-F1
DELLN-F4 INSLN-F5
DISABLED
565 NETDATA
EDIT-F6 DELETE-F7 ENTER-F8
When the comment display appears, the loop number, alarm number, etc.,
you selected for comment appears at the top of the screen. The cursor is
positioned for you to begin typing in your comment.
Type in the comment and enter it by pressing ENTER-F8.
Documenting Your
Program
8-27
8.13
Changing
Operating Mode
Use the PG/RN function to change controller operating mode while you are
working in S-memory directories. To invoke the operation, press PG/RN-F5.
When you have S-memory configured, you receive a display with three
fields, as shown in bold type below, to change operating mode. Use the
arrow keys to position the cursor in the desired field. Function keys are
available for each field to select the desired option.
LADDERS = PROG
Changing Ladder
Mode
LOOPS = PROG
When you position the cursor on the LADDERS field, the following options
are available. (With no S-memory configured, the LADDERS field is the only
option for changing program mode and no cursor is displayed.)
WARNING
Intelligent I/O modules (e.g., the 386/ATMt module, the Programmable BASIC
module, the Servo Axis module, or the High Speed Pulse Input module) can
update outputs even when the controller is in PROGRAM mode, if your code
permits.
If an intelligent I/O module writes directly to an image register point, its write
takes precedence even when PGMFRZ/PGMOFF is in effect. This could cause
unexpected control action, resulting in death or serious injury to personnel,
and/or damage to equipment.
Do not write directly to output image register points from an intelligent I/O
module. Instead, write to a Control Relay or V-memory location and have your
RLL program copy this location to the output point.
8-28
Changing Loop
Mode
To select loop operating mode, position the cursor in the LOOPS field. You
then have the following options available.
PGM-F2 places the loop card in PROGRAM mode, and control blocks
are neither running nor being queued for running. Your loop card
cannot be in PROGRAM mode, however, while the discrete CPU is in
RUN mode.
HALT-F3 places the loop card in HOLD mode; enabled control blocks are
being queued to run, but are not running. Upon returning to RUN
mode, execution resumes where it was halted.
RUN-F4 places the loop card in the RUN mode; enabled control blocks
are being queued and are running.
When you elect to go to RUN mode, you may receive the message,
PROFIBUS-DP IS STOPPED, CONTINUE TO PLC RUN MODE?. Select
either YES or NO.
The loop mode can either follow that of the discrete CPU or be in RUN mode
independent of the ladder program. To invoke this option, place the cursor
in the LOCKED or UNLOCKED field. Your function keys are then as follows.
UNLOCK-F2 frees the loop card for selection of RUN operating mode
independent of the ladder CPU.
LOCK-F3 locks the loop card to follow the operating mode selected for
ladders.
8-29
8.14
Determining Status
Enabling/Disabling
Control Blocks
You can enable or disable control blocks either from the directory or the
table display. The Enable/Disable key operates the same from either
location.
Modifying the Enable/Disable status in the Ramp/Soak table of a loop
operates on the entire loop. To disable Ramp/Soak only, you must program
NO for RAMP/SOAK ON SP in the Loop Table.
If a loop or alarm control block is disabled, setting the V-flags to
manual/auto/cascade mode for a loop or to enable/disable for an alarm has
no effect. The control block must be enabled for the V-flags to be active.
To enable or disable a control block from a directory, complete the following
steps.
1.
Select the control block by keying in the element and identifier and
pressing Return ; or using the arrow keys to position the cursor on the
desired loop, alarm, etc., in the directory display.
2.
3.
Then press ENABLE-F2 if you want to enable the control block; or press
DISABL-F3 if you want to disable the control block.
8-30
1.
2.
Then press ENABLE-F2 if you want to enable the control block; or press
DISABL-F3 if you want to disable the control block.
8.15
Compiling SF Programs/Subroutines
Why Choose
Compiled Mode
for an SF Program
or Subroutine?
Selecting
Compiled Mode
When compiled mode is selected (if your controller model supports compiled
mode), the SF program or subroutine is translated to the native instruction
set of the CPUs microprocessor. The compiled code is then executed
whenever the SF program or subroutine is scheduled for execution. The
advantages of compiled execution include the following:
C D 1 PALLET 5
D 2 PALLET 6
D 3 PALLET 7
D 4 PALLET 8
D 5 PALLET 9
DIS/CP accesses
Enable/Disable and
Compile/NoCompile
functions.
SELECT: SFPGM0001
EXIT-F1 SHOW-F2 BLOCK-F3 DIS/CP-F4 PG/RN-F5
575 NETDATA PG
LOOP-F6 ALARM-F7 SFSUB-F8
F4
575 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1 ENABLE-F2 DISABL-F3
COMPIL-F5 NOCMPL-F6
8-31
NOTE: You must disable the SF program or SF subroutine before you can
select compile or no compile mode.
Determining
Compiled Status
8-32
Chapter 9
Documenting Programs
9.1
9-2
9.2
9-4
9.3
Entering Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-7
9.4
9-9
9.5
9-12
9.6
Titling Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-14
9.7
9-16
9.8
9-18
Documenting Programs
9-1
9.1
Available
Documentation
Using External
Editors
9-2
Documenting Programs
Accessing
Documentation
Functions
From the TISOFT start-up screen, press the keys as listed below to invoke
the Documentation Menu. If you are already at the Ladder Display, press
DOCUM-F4. The function key menu shown in Figure 9-1 invokes all
documentation operations.
1.
2.
Press DOCUM-F4.
TITLE
*
DATE:
VERSION:
545 LOADER1
EXIT-F1
COM-F2
SYN-F3 TITLE-F4
Documenting Programs
9-3
9.2
Selecting an
Element
Details of the ways to select an element are shown in the next two sections.
Using the
Comment Field to
Select an Element
Type in the element type at the COMMENT: field. For example, type in Y.
See Figure 9-2.
2.
Type in the identifier at the COMMENT: field. For example, type in 450.
3.
Press
Return
TITLE
Your Document Title
*
DATE:
VERSION:
COMMENT: Y000450
EXIT-F1 IMPORT-F2 EXPORT-F3
545 LOADER1
RECOVR-F8
SETUP-F5
9-4
Documenting Programs
To select an element using the pop-up list, use the following procedure:
1.
2.
Use the arrow keys to select the element from the list. For example, if
you want a comment tied to Y, Highlight Y and press Return . The
element type, Yxxx, is displayed in the COMMENT: field, and you are
returned to the previous screen. See Figure 9-2.
3.
Type in the identifier for the element; for example, type in 450 in the
COMMENT: field.
4.
Press
Return
TITLE
Your Document Title
*
LIST
ELEMENT COIL
END
Y
ENDC
C
GTS
JMP
JMPE
LBL
MCR
MCRE
SBR
SKP
MORE
MISC.
LOOP
ALARM
SFPGM
SFSUB
DATE:
VERSION:
EXIT-F1
HELP-F4
545 LOADER1
SELECT-F8
Documenting Programs
9-5
Invoking the
Comment Editor
Menu
After you select the element for comment, the Comment Editor Menu
(Figure 9-4) is displayed with function keys for editing.
Y000450
PAGING: NONE
ABORT-F1
DELLN-F4 INSLN-F5
545 LOADER1
EDIT-F6 DELETE-F7 ENTER-F8
9-6
Documenting Programs
9.3
Entering Comments
Keying in
Comments
Adding Paging
Instructions
Saving Comments
When the Comment Editor Menu (see Figure 9-4) is displayed, the cursor is
positioned at the starting point for a comment. Type in your comment for
the selected element. The following keys are available for editing:
Delete: Press DEL to delete a single character. Use with the cursor at
the end of a line to delete the Return and append the following line by
filling the line at the cursor position.
Insert: Press INS to invoke the insert mode. Add a Return after the
insert to split a line at any point and move the text after the Return to
the following line. Toggle off the insert mode by pressing INS again.
INSLN-F5: Press F5 to insert a blank line above the line on which the
cursor is positioned.
After keying in your comment, use the down arrow key to position the
cursor at the PAGING field.
Press ODD-F1 to have the comment and rung appear on separate pages
when printed. (ODD causes the page to feed to the top of the next odd
page before the comment has printed.)
To save the comments, press ENTER-F8 before exiting the Comment Editor
Menu.
Documenting Programs
9-7
After entering a comment, you may want to edit it later. When you do,
follow the same procedure to find the comment as you used at entry.
1.
Press DOCUM-F4.
2.
Press COM-F2.
3.
4.
Press
Return
Changing a
Comment
After you display the comment, the edit function keys are available. Use the
arrow keys to position the cursor at the point you are changing. Then insert
or delete text as desired.
Recovering and
Rebuilding
Comment Files
2.
NOTE: If there is not enough space in the default drive and directory to
temporarily store the comment data, choose another drive and/or directory.
Select
RECOVR-F8
COMMENT: Y000001
LOADER1
RECOVR-F8
SETUP-F5
9-8
Documenting Programs
9.4
Selecting an
Element
Details of the ways to select an element are shown in the next two sections.
NOTE: IO, X, and Y with the same identifier refer to the same point and
synonym. WIO, WX and WY with the same identifier refer to the same word
and synonym. TCW, TCP, and TCC with the same identifier refer to the
same synonym. Word synonym elements can have bit-of-word synonyms.
To use the SYNONYM: field to select an element, use the following procedure:
1.
Type in the element type at the SYNONYM field. For example, type in Y.
See Figure 9-6.
2.
Type in the identifier at the SYNONYM field. For example, type in 450.
3.
Press
Return
TITLE
Your Document Title
*
DATE:
VERSION:
SYNONYM: Y000000450
SETUP-F5
545 LOADER1
RECOVR-F8
Documenting Programs
9-9
To select an element using the pop-up list, use the following procedure:
1.
2.
Use the arrow keys to select the element from the list. For example, if
you want a synonym tied to Y, highlight Y and press Return . You return
to the previous screen and the element type, Yxxx, is displayed in the
SYNONYM:field. See Figure 9-6.
3.
Type in the identifier for the element; for example, type in 450 in the
SYNONYM: field.
4.
Press
Return
TITLE
Your Document Title
*
ELEMENT
X
Y
C
V
K
WX
WY
LIST
COIL
END
ENDC
GTS
JMP
JMPE
LBL
MCR
MCRE
SBR
SKP
MORE
MISC.
IO
TCP
TCC
WIO
TCW
DATE:
VERSION:
EXIT-F1
HELP-F4
545 LOADER1
SELECT-F8
9-10
Documenting Programs
Invoking the
Synonym Editor
Menu
After you select the element for synonyms and descriptors, the Synonym
Editor Menu, Figure 9-8, displays with function keys available for editing.
The element you selected and up to four locations following it are displayed.
ELEMENT
SYNONYM
DESCRIPTOR
Y450
Y451
Y452
Y453
Y454
EXIT-F1
DELLN-F4 INSLN-F5
545 LOADER1
FIND-F6 DELETE-F7 DESCR-F8
You also have the option of entering synonyms and descriptors through the
pop-up synonym editor, which is accessible at most locations in your
program. This allows you the option of entering a synonym or descriptor at
the point you are entering or editing your program.
Your synonyms and descriptors are saved when you exit the display.
To access the pop-up synonym editor, press Cntl L. Then, at the SYNONYM
prompt, type in the element you want tied to a synonym or descriptor and
press Return .
For example, after you press Cntl L, enter C25 at the prompt, and press
Return , you see a display similar to that shown in Figure 9-9. To select a
bit-of-word element for a synonym, type the word element followed by a
period and the bit number (for example, V100.9).
You can also place the cursor on the element for which you want to create a
synonym or descriptor and then press Cntl L. This way, the SYNONYM prompt
will have your selected element displayed; then press Return .
Documenting Programs
9-11
9.5
C25
Y37
ELEMENT
SYNONYM
C25
Control
Relay 25
EXIT-F1
DESCRIPTOR
DELLN-F4 INSLN-F5
545 LOADER1
FIND-F6 DELETE-F7 DESCR-F8
9-12
At the initial display, the cursor is positioned for you to type in a synonym.
Use the alphanumeric keyboard on your programming device to type in the
synonyms and descriptors. The following keys are available for editing:
Delete: Press DEL to delete a single character. Use with the cursor at
the end of a line to delete the Return and append the following line by
filling the line at the cursor position.
Insert: Press INS to invoke the insert mode. Add a Return after the
insert to split a line at any point and move the text after the Return to
the following line. Toggle the insert mode off by pressing INS.
INSLN-F5: Press F5 to insert a blank line above the line on which the
cursor is positioned.
Documenting Programs
Finding a Synonym
To find a synonym, complete the steps below to locate and display it.
1.
Press DOCUM-F4.
2.
Press SYN-F3.
3.
4.
Press
Return
Changing a
Synonym
After you display the synonym, the edit function keys are available. Use the
arrow keys or F8 to position the cursor at the point you are changing. Then
insert or delete text as desired.
Recovering and
Rebuilding
Synonym Files
2.
NOTE: If there is not enough space in the default drive and directory to
temporarily store the synonym data, choose another drive and/or directory.
Select
RECOVR-F8
SYNONYM: Y000000450
LOADER1
RECOVR-F8
SETUP-F5
Documenting Programs
9-13
9.6
Titling Programs
TITLE
*
DATE:
VERSION:
545 LOADER1
EXIT-F1
COM-F2
SYN-F3 TITLE-F4
TITLE
DATE:
VERSION:
ABORT-F1
DELLN-F4 INSLN-F5
545 LOADER1
EDIT-F6 DELETE-F7 ENTER-F8
9-14
Documenting Programs
Title Parameters
Entering a Title
Enter the title by keying in the desired text with the alphanumeric keys on
your keyboard. You can use Backspace to delete characters to the left of the
cursor. The following keys are available for editing:
Delete: Press DEL to delete a single character. Use with the cursor at
the end of a line to delete the Return and append the following line by
filling the line at the cursor position.
Insert: Press INS to invoke the insert mode. Add a Return after the
insert to split a line at any point and move the text after the Return to
the following line. Toggle the insert mode off by pressing INS.
INSLN-F5: Press F5 to insert a blank line above the line on which the
cursor is positioned.
After keying in your title, use the up/down arrow keys to position the cursor
on the DATE field and/or VERSION field. The DATE field accepts three sets of
two numeric characters. The VERSION field accepts any five characters,
numeric or alphabetic.
Saving Titles
To save the title you have created, press ENTER-F8 before exiting the Title
Display.
Documenting Programs
9-15
9.7
Accessing
Comment Display
Press DOCUM-F4.
2.
Press COM-F2.
3.
Press
4.
5.
6.
Press
or Shift
Return
LOOP 2
PAGING: NONE
ABORT-F1
DELLN-F4 INSLN-F5
545 LOADER1
EDIT-F6 DELETE-F7 ENTER-F8
9-16
Documenting Programs
Keying in
Comments
Saving Comments
Enter the comments by keying in the desired text with the alphanumeric
keys on your keyboard. You can use Backspace to delete characters to the left
of the cursor. The following keys are available for editing:
Delete: Press DEL to delete a single character. Use with the cursor at
the end of a line to delete the Return and append the following line by
filling the line at the cursor position.
Insert: Press INS to invoke the insert mode. Add a Return after the
insert to split a line at any point and move the text after the Return to
the following line. Toggle the insert mode off by pressing INS.
INSLN-F5: Press F5 to insert a blank line above the line on which the
cursor is positioned.
To save the comments, press ENTER-F8 before exiting the comment menu.
Documenting Programs
9-17
9.8
Setup Procedure
Press DOCUM-F4.
2.
3.
DELIMITER:<TAB> QUOTES AROUND DATA: NO EACH RECORD ENDS WITH CR/LF: YES
EXIT-F1
NO-F2
YES-F3
9-18
Documenting Programs
Esc
The set-up function sets the type of field delimiter to a tab character or any
printable character you choose except space, numeral, upper and lower case
characters, period, or double quotes.
To change the delimiter character, position the cursor in the DELIMITER
field with the arrow keys and type the character you want to use as the
delimiter. Refer to Figure 9-14.
Selecting Quotes
Around Data
Setup also allows you to select whether to have quotes around the data. To
select quotes around data, place the cursor in the QUOTES AROUND DATA:
field and press YES-F3 to select quotes or NO-F2 to select no quotes. See
Figure 9-14.
Selecting the
End-of-Record
Character
Setup also lets you decide whether to end records with a carriage return/line
feed or not. To select the end-of-record characters, place the cursor in the
EACH RECORD ENDS WITH CR/LF: field and press NO-F2 or YES-F3. Refer
to Figure 9-14.
Documenting Programs
9-19
Press DOCUM-F4.
2.
3.
Ensure that the delimiters are set up. Refer to the following
paragraphs in this section: Setup Procedure; Setting Field Delimiter;
Selecting Quotes Around Data; and Selecting the End-of-Record
Character.
4.
5.
SYNONYM: Y000001
EXIT-F1 IMPORT-F2 EXPORT-F3
545 LOADER1
RECOVR-F8
SETUP-F5
9-20
EXIT-F1 or
screen.
Documenting Programs
Esc
: Press F1 or
Esc
Comment Fields
Table 9-1 describes the fields used in the comment text file to identify and
separate various parts of the data. If B (Before) or O (Odd) are not found in
the paging field, then N (None) is the default. Refer to Section 9.3, Entering
Comments, for more details on formatting comments.
The paging field and the type and ID field are automatically converted to
upper case when they are imported.
Table 9-1 Comment Fields
Synonym Fields
Field
Maximum Size
Description
12
Paging: N, B, or O.
318
60
Table 9-2 describes the fields used in the synonym text file to identify and
separate various parts of the data. Refer to Section 9.4, Preparing to Enter
Synonyms and/or Descriptors, for more information about synonym fields.
The type and ID field is automatically converted to upper case when it is
imported.
Table 9-2 Synonym Fields
Field
Maximum Size
Description
12
24
11
57
48
Documenting Programs
9-21
Synonyms or comments not in the text file, but in the selected program,
remain unchanged in the selected program.
Synonyms or comments that are in both the text file and the selected
program are overwritten in the selected program.
Synonyms or comments in the text file, but not in the selected program,
are added to the selected program.
NOTE: To exactly copy the synonyms and comments in the text file, you
must delete all synonyms and comments in the selected program before
running the import function.
Exporting
Synonyms and
Comments
9-22
Documenting Programs
Chapter 10
10-2
10.2
10-3
10.3
10-4
10.4
10-6
10.5
10-7
10.6
10-9
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.10
10.11
10.12
10.13
10.14
10.15
10-1
10.1
Discrete I/O
Loop Variables
Status Words
Word I/O
While in the ladder status display, you can observe the status of selected
elements in your ladder program.
While in the status or chart mode, you can toggle controller operating mode
between PROGRAM and RUN.
You can initiate a single scan of your program from either Status or Chart
mode, but the controller must be in PROGRAM modenot RUN modeto
execute this function.
If your controller supports more than one task, you can select which tasks to
execute during the single scan.
10-2
10.2
Accessing Chart
and Ladder Status
Functions
To access the menus for status, complete the following steps from the
Start-up Screen.
1.
Press ONLINE-F4.
2.
Whether you select status or chart, either of the function key menus that
are then displayed enables you to toggle between Ladder Status and Chart
Status with F8.
Status is automatically updated in both the status and chart displays. While
status is on, the message, UPDATE IN PROGRESS, is displayed. Any error
message you receive does not remain displayed, but is replaced on the next
update cycle.
Accessing the List
Display
LOCATION
STATUS
ELEMENT
X
Y
C
V
K
WX
WY
STW
EXITF1
STATUS CHART
LOCATION
STATUS
LIST
LOOP
ALARM
LACK
AACK
LADB
AADB
LCFH
ACFH
LCFL
ACFL
LERR
AERR
LHA
AHA
LHHA
AHHA
LKC
ALA
LKD
ALLA
LLA
AODA
MORE MORE
LOCATION
STATUS
MISC.
DSP
DSC
DCP
DCC
TCP
TCC
LPET
APET
PPET
SPET
MORE
545 NETDATA
SELECTF8
HELPF4
10-3
10.3
Accessing Build
Chart
Making Entries in
the Chart
To invoke the display for building a status chart, complete either of the
following sequence of steps from the Start-up Screen.
Either
Or
1.
Press ONLINE-F4.
1. Press OFFLINE-F8.
2.
Press CHART-F8.
2. Press BLDCHT-F7.
3.
Press BLDCHT-F3.
Type in the element type and identifier number. If you want to change the
numeric format of the display, complete the steps given in the section,
Changing Numeric Format, page 10-5, before moving the cursor off the
entry. You can have a maximum of 57 entries per chart (Figure 10-2).
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the next field, or copy the next
element from field to field with Return .
To set the cursor movement of Return , use DIRECT-F2. After you press
DIRECT-F2, you have three options for cursor movement.
If you enter an invalid element while building a chart, you must correct the
error condition or clear the element before you can move the cursor or exit
the display.
LOCATION
EXIT-F1
STATUS
DIRECT-F2
STATUS CHART
LOCATION
STATUS
LOCATION
STATUS
545 NETDATA RN
ASCII-F4 CLRCHT-F5 CLRLOC-F6 RDCHT-F7 WRCHT-F8 +
10-4
Displaying Data in
ASCII Format
Using the ASCII feature enables you to display the contents of V-, K-, WX-,
WY-, and G-memory locations in ASCII characters. To create a display,
complete the following steps from the Build Chart menu.
1.
2.
Press ASCII-F4.
You receive a prompt requesting the number of words to display in the
sequence beginning with the address entered above (two ASCII
characters displayed per word).
3.
4.
Changing Numeric
Format
Press
Return
or ENTER-F8.
2.
If you select a format that is not allowed for a particular element type, an
error message is displayed to tell you that the format is not allowed for that
type. No key is required for bit format; it is selected automatically for
discretes and cannot be altered.
Entering Elements
in Sequence
10-5
10.4
Clearing a Chart
Display
Using the arrow keys, position the cursor on the location to be cleared.
2.
Press CLRLOC-F6.
Clearing a display:
Saving a Status
Chart
10-6
1.
Press CLRCHT-F5.
2.
Press YES-F2.
You can save charts to recall for later use. This enables you to monitor and
debug a variety of locations in your program without having to rebuild a
chart each time. To save a status chart from the Build Chart Display,
complete the steps below.
1.
2.
Either use the arrow keys to select the filename from the window, or
press FLDTGL-F6 and type in a name at the prompt where the current
chart is to be stored.
3.
Return
10.5
Loading a Status
Chart
To load a chart, complete the following steps from the Status Chart or Build
Chart Display. Figure 10-3 shows the Status Chart Display; Read Chart is
F7 on either display. Remember that the newly-loaded chart will overwrite
the current chart display.
1.
2.
Either use the arrow keys to select the filename from the window, or
type in a name at the prompt where the current chart is stored.
3.
Return
STATUS CHART
LOCATION
STATUS
LOCATION
STATUS
LOCATION
UPDATE IN PROGRESS
STATUS
565 NETDATA PG
RDCHT-F7 STATUS-F8
10-7
Status is shown for the elements in your chart display in the format given
below. The areas shaded in the examples are shown in reverse video on your
display.
Controller Status CHART Display
10-8
ON :
X23 = ON
OFF:
X23 = OFF
Forced ON:
X23 = ON
Forced OFF:
X23 = OFF
Value:
V23 = 126
Forced Value:
WY56
ASCII:
V125 = ABCD
= 126
10.6
Locating Ladder
Addresses
Locating Elements
Display the section of the program you need by completing the following
steps.
1.
2.
Press FIND-F3 or
3.
Press ADDR-F2.
4.
At the prompt, enter the address of the ladder rung you want
displayed.
5.
Press
Return
Ctrl
To use the Find function in locating elements, after pressing FIND-F3, enter
the desired element type and identifier at the prompt.
For example, if you want to locate WX20, you can simply type in WX20.
Press
Return
FIND: WY101.9
BIT ONLY
EXIT-F1
NOP-F3 NXTIN-F4
ADDR-F2
OUTPUT ONLY
545 LOADER1 PG
WDBTGL-F7 OUTTGL-F8
ADDR-F2 allows you to select the address for a rung of ladder logic as
the element type you want to find.
10-9
10.7
Invoking Ladder
Status Functions
The Ladder Status display, shown in Figure 10-5, provides access to status
and debug functions for ladders.
C60
X22
1
TMR6
X22
C61
P= 5.0
C= 2.5
UPDATE IN PROGRESS
EXIT-F1 CHGVAL-F2 FIND-F3 PG/RN-F4 S.SCAN-F5 SELECT-F6
565 NETDATA PG
CHART-F8 +
X25
X25
Y23
Y23
X25
X25
Y23
Y23
X25
X25
Y23
Y23
X25
X25
Y23
Y23
ON:
OFF:
FORCED ON:
FORCED OFF:
10-10
For box instructions, the information shown in Status Mode is updated for
each type of box listed in Table 10-1.
Table 10-1 Status Information for Box Instructions
Box
TMR/CTR/UDC:
MCAT/DCAT:
Values
Description
P = 123.4
Preset value
C = 12.3
Current value
C = 12.3
Current value
P = 34.5
Preset value
DRUM:
EVENT DRUM:
MASK DRUM:
IMC/SMC:
Relational Contacts:
(<, >, =, < =, > =, < >)
10-11
10.8
Displaying
Synonyms
Displaying
Comments
10-12
TISOFT allows you to display synonyms for your ladder rungs while in the
status operation. To enable the synonym display, complete the following
steps from your ladder status display.
1.
Press SPACEBAR.
2.
Press SYNTGL-F2.
TISOFT allows you to display comments for your ladder rungs while in the
status operation. To enable the comment display, complete the following
steps from your ladder status display.
1.
Press SPACEBAR.
2.
Press COMTGL-F1.
10.9
Initiating a Single
Scan
Using a single scan allows you to view a single execution of your program.
You must have the controller in program mode in order to execute a single
scan. If you need to change to program mode, use PG/RN-F4 from either the
Ladder or the Chart status display to make the change. (See Section 10.14.)
To perform a single scan of your program, complete the following steps from
either the Ladder or the Chart status display.
Selecting Tasks to
Execute during
Single Scan
1.
2.
If your programmable controller supports the Single Scan pop-up task box
for more than one task, you can select which tasks to execute during the
single scan.
Use the Up/Down arrow keys to position the cursor, then press Y to
include a task in the scan or N to exclude the task from the scan. (See
Figure 10-7.)
SAVE-F4 saves the task box selection but does not execute the single scan.
START-F8 saves the task box selection and executes the single scan.
Alt Q executes a single scan according to the single scan task configuration
without displaying it.
ROW: 1
COL: 1
X12
X13
C6
X17
C112
ABORT-F1
TASK SCAN
1
Y
2
Y
3
YS.SCAN 2
4
Y
5
Y
0.050
6
Y
0.019
7
Y
8
Y
9
Y
10
Y
11
Y
12
Y
13
Y
14
Y
15
Y
16
Y
SAVE-F4
C6
545 NETDATA PG
START-F8
10-13
10.10
Accessing the
Change Value
Function
You have an element edit function available after you have selected either
STATUS-F7 or CHART-F8 from the main ladder display. The edit functions
are the same from either entry point, as illustrated in Figure 10-8 below.
The CHGVAL function provides access to the read, write, force, unforce, and
find force functions.
On-line Only
CHART
EXIT
CHGVAL
BLDCHT
PG/RN
S.SCAN
PG/RN
S.SCAN
RDCHT
STATUS
On-line Only
STATUS
SYNTGL
SELECT
CHART
SPACEBAR +
COMTGL
EXIT
CLEAR
NEXT
SYNTGL
RDTBL WRTBL
ENTER
OR
EXIT
EXIT
CHGVAL
EXIT
READ
SEEK
FORCE
UNFORC
UN.ALL
WRITE
SPACEBAR (+)
HEX
BIN
INT
+/
DOUBLE
REAL
TMR.1S
TMR1MS
10-14
After you select the edit (CHGVAL) function, a prompt line appears for
entry of the element type and identifier. The prompt line shows you the
current format and forced state of the element type and identifier (unless
you have made a change to the prompt linein this case, you need to
perform a read to obtain the correct status).
The forced status is indicated by the word FORCED to the right of the format.
If the word FORCED is not displayed, the element is not forced.
Updates and
Messages
While you are in the Change Value function, the main display continues to
be updated. All information and error messages remain on the screen until
you press a key. If no information or error messages are being displayed, the
message, UPDATE IN PROGRESS, is displayed.
Checking Numeric
Format
Numeric formats you have selected for particular types of elements affect
the manner in which you use the edit functions. For example, both real and
double formats require two consecutive words each for storage and display.
Since discrete elements (X, Y, & C) show only on and off status, there is no
format selection for discretes. These elements can be forced.
Word, loop and alarm elements show a value for status. Only WX and WY
word elements can be forced.
Incrementing/
Decrementing
Element Addresses
F9 increments the element address; F10 decrements the address. Both keys
perform a read with the address change provided the operation before using
the F9 and F10 keys was a read. If any operation other than a read was
performed before pressing F9 or F10, a read is not done.
You can use Alt Q to execute a single scan while you are in Change Value;
refer to Section 10.9.
10-15
10.11
Reading Status
Writing Values
Press CHGVAL-F2.
2.
3.
4.
Press READ-F2.
WARNING
In both PROGRAM mode and RUN mode, all changes made to the output image
register are reflected in the output modules.
Manually changing the state of an output (writing a value or forcing an element)
could put the process in an uncontrolled state. Death or serious injury to
personnel, and/or damage to equipment, could ensue.
Use caution when using the Write and Force functions in your application.
WARNING
From either the ladder or chart display, complete the following steps.
10-16
1.
Press CHGVAL-F2.
2.
At the prompt, type in the element type and identifier for changing
value.
3.
Use the right arrow key to position the cursor in the value field.
4.
5.
6.
Press WRITE-F8.
10.12
Forcing Elements
WARNING
Forcing an Element
To use the Force function from either the Status or Chart display, complete
the following steps.
1.
Press CHGVAL-F2.
2.
3.
Use the right arrow key to position the cursor on the value field.
4.
5.
Type in the value to be forced for the selected element. For discretes,
you can use 1 or 0, ON or OFF, N or F, or T or F.
6.
Press FORCE-F4.
Remember that, if the format is real or double, two consecutive memory
locations will be forced.
Finding a Forced
Element
To find the next occurrence of a forced element for a specified type, complete
the following steps from either the Status or Chart display.
1.
Press CHGVAL-F2.
2.
3.
Type an identifier for the element type. This number sets the starting
point for the search. The seek function will find the next occurrence of
the forced element type after the number you select as the identifier.
4.
5.
Press SEEK-F3.
10-17
10.13
Unforcing Elements
Unforcing an
Element
Press CHGVAL-F2.
2.
3.
4.
Press UNFORC-F5.
10-18
Press CHGVAL-F2.
2.
10.14
Toggling from
Program to Run
You can change operating mode of the controller from either the chart or
ladder status display. First, press PG/RN-F4.
When you have S-memory configured, you receive a display with three
fields, as shown in bold type below, to change operating mode. Use the
arrow keys to position the cursor in the desired field. Function keys are
available for each field to select the desired option.
LADDERS = PROG
Changing Ladder
Mode
LOOPS = PROG
When you position the cursor on the LADDERS field, the following options
are available. (With no S-memory configured, the LADDERS field is the only
option for changing program mode and no cursor is displayed.)
WARNING
Intelligent I/O modules (e.g., the 386/ATM module, the Programmable BASIC
module, the Servo Axis module, or the High Speed Pulse Input module) can
update outputs even when the controller is in PROGRAM mode, if your code
permits.
If an intelligent I/O module writes directly to an image register point, its write
takes precedence even when PGMFRZ/PGMOFF is in effect. This could cause
unexpected control action, resulting in death or serious injury to personnel,
and/or damage to equipment.
Do not write directly to output image register points from an intelligent I/O
module. Instead, write to a control relay or V-memory location and have your
RLL program copy this location to the output point.
10-19
Changing Loop
Mode
To select loop operating mode, position the cursor in the LOOPS field. You
then have the following options available.
PGM-F2 places the loop card in PROGRAM mode, and control blocks
are neither running nor being queued for running.
NOTE: Your loop card cannot be in PROGRAM mode while the discrete CPU
is in RUN mode.
HALT-F3 places the loop card in HOLD mode; enabled control blocks are
being queued to run, but are not running. Upon returning to RUN
mode, execution resumes where it was halted.
RUN-F4 places the loop card in the RUN mode; enabled control blocks
are being queued and are running.
When you elect to go to RUN mode, you may receive the message,
PROFIBUS-DP IS STOPPED, CONTINUE TO PLC RUN MODE?. Select
either YES or NO.
The loop mode can either follow that of the discrete CPU or be in RUN mode
independent of the ladder program. To invoke this option, place the cursor
in the LOCKED or UNLOCKED field. Your function keys are then as follows.
10-20
UNLOCK-F2 frees the loop card for selection of RUN operating mode
independent of the ladder CPU.
LOCK-F3 locks the loop card to follow the operating mode selected for
ladders.
10.15
Displaying Ladders
with a Chart
Press SELECT-F6.
You receive a Selection Table, shown in Figure 10-9, for making entries
to define the rungs and chart to be displayed. Use CLEAR-F2 to delete
entries from any of the Selection Table fields.
X0
X1
C1
Y2
1
C0
Selection Table
Y11
X1
C0
X1
X2
Y11
RUNG
RUNG
RUNG
RUNG
RUNG
RUNG
RUNG
9
Y10
X2
000015
000001
CHART: CHART1
LINES: 6
15
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
545 LOADER1 RN
RDTBL-F6 WRTBL-F7 ENTER-F8
Type in the ladder addresses of the rungs. Move the cursor from field to
field with the arrow keys. If you want the rungs displayed sequentially,
press NEXT-F3 in each rung field after keying in the first address.
If you do not enter any addresses in the Selection Table, the screen
displays sequential rungs, beginning with the cursor position.
3.
With the cursor on the Chart field, press SELCHT-F4 to enter the
filename of the chart to be loaded. Or, to use the current chart already
in RAM, press CURRNT-F3.
4.
Type in the number of lines (1 to 13) to be displayed from the chart you
selected. This number has no effect if there is no chart selected.
5.
10-21
To save a selection table, complete the steps below from the Select Display.
1.
Loading a
Selection Table
2.
Either use the arrow keys to select the filename from the window, or
type in a name at the prompt where the current table is to be stored.
3.
Return
To load a selection table that you have previously saved, complete the
following steps from the Select Display.
1.
10-22
2.
Either use the arrow keys to select the filename from the window, or
type in a name (of the table to be read) at the prompt.
3.
Press SELECT-F8 if you selected the filename from the window or press
Return if you keyed in the filename.
Chapter 11
11-2
11.2
11-5
11.3
11-7
11.4
11-8
11.5
11-9
11.6
11.7
Performing Controller Diagnostics (AUX 15, 20, 23, 27, 28, 29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.8
11.9
11.10
11.11
11.12
11.13
11.14
11.15
11.16
11.17
11-1
11.1
Controller Auxiliary
Functions
11-2
Accessing
Auxiliary Functions
Menu
To display the auxiliary functions menu, press AUX-F6 (or A) from the
on-line ladder display. Since AUX functions are controller-based, the
selections available on the AUX menu depend on the controller model you
have. Figure 11-1 shows the auxiliary functions menu; as you highlight the
function category, the individual auxiliary functions available are displayed.
To select a particular AUX function, either use the arrow keys to position
the cursor on the AUX function, or type the number of the function, then
press Return .
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
DIAGNOSTICS
SAVE PLC
LOAD PLC
CLEAR PLC
RESETS AND RESTARTS
MISCELLANEOUS
DIAGNOSTICS
20.
21.
22.
25.
28.
29.
17.
15.
23.
PLC DIAGNOSTICS
REMOTE BASE DIAG
SYNTAX CHECK
DISPLAY FAILED I/O
MEMORY AVAILABILITY
PLC OPERATIONAL STATUS
COMPARE PLC TO DISK
SYSTEM PART NUMBER
RBC PART NUMBER
545 LINE1 RN
PGMS-F7
11-3
AUX Functions
20. PLC Diagnostics
21. Remote Base Diagnostics
22. Syntax Check
25. Display Failed I/O
27. PLC Card Failure
Save Controller
60. All
61. Ladder
62. Variable
63. Constant
64. Loops
65. Analog Alarms
66. SF Programs
67. SF Subroutines
42. Save U-memory
Load Controller
Clear Controller
37. DSP/DCP
74. Loops
75. Analog Alarms
76. SF Programs
77. SF Subroutines
41. Clear U-memory
10. Power/up
11. Partial Restart
NOTE: If no S-memory is configured, AUX 6467, 7477, and 9497 are not
displayed. If no U-memory is configured, AUX 4043 are not displayed. If a
hot back-up card is not present, AUX 82 is not displayed. If your controller
model does not support EEPROM programming, AUX 84 is not displayed. If
your controller does not support PROFIBUS-DP I/O, AUX 86 is not
displayed.
The 520, 530, 520C, 530C, and 525 controllers do not display the following
AUX functions: 14, 16, 18, 21, 22, 27, 33, 4043, 6367, 7477, 82, 83, 86,
9397.
11-4
11.2
Powering up the
Controller (AUX 10)
CAUTION
If you execute AUX 10 with the controller battery switch set to Off, all programs
residing in the controller will be cleared.
Be certain to check battery switch position before using AUX 10.
To execute AUX 10, use the numeric keys to enter 10 at the menu prompt,
then press Return .
When you receive the message, PLC POWER UP RESTART?, confirm by
pressing YES-F2.
For 575 controllers, you are also prompted with COORDINATE RESET WITH
OTHER APPLICATIONS: and COORDINATE RESET WITH ENTIRE
SYSTEM:. For each of these prompts, press NO-F1 or YES-F2 as required for
your process.
11-5
Use AUX 11 to clear all discrete elements except retentive C and forced
elements. The word elements and presets are not reset.
To execute AUX 11, use the numeric keys to enter 11 at the menu prompt,
then press Return .
When you receive the message, PLC PARTIAL RESTART?, confirm by
pressing YES-F2.
For 575 controllers, you are also prompted with COORDINATE RESET WITH
OTHER APPLICATIONS: and COORDINATE RESET WITH ENTIRE
SYSTEM:. For each of these prompts, press NO-F1 or YES-F2 as required for
your process.
Performing a
Complete Restart
(AUX 12)
Use AUX 12 to clear all discrete elements and word elements, including
retentive C elements. AUX 12 also clears controller fatal errors. Forced
discrete elements and forced word elements are not reset. To execute AUX
12, use the numeric keys to enter 12 at the menu prompt, then press Return .
When you receive the message, PLC COMPLETE RESTART?, confirm by
pressing YES-F2.
For 575 controllers, you are also prompted with COORDINATE RESET WITH
OTHER APPLICATIONS: and COORDINATE RESET WITH ENTIRE
SYSTEM:. For each of these prompts, press NO-F1 or YES-F2 as required for
your process.
11-6
11.3
Loading Memory
Types (AUX 43,
9099)
Use AUX 43 and AUX 90 through 99 to load specified memory types to your
controller.
NOTE: Your controller will list only the numbers for the memory types in
that particular model. Not all memory types are available in all models.
AUX 43 and AUX 9199 require that the controller memory configuration
be larger than, or equal to, the memory configuration on the disk.
AUX 90 loads ladder memory, V-memory, K-memory, U-memory, Series 505
I/O configurations for all bases, PROFIBUS-DP I/O configurations for all
slaves, bus parameters for the PROFIBUS-DP I/O channel, memory
configuration, scan time, and watchdog timer value. AUX 90 does not load
forced word I/O or forced discrete I/O (X, Y, and C).
AUX 91 loads ladder memory only, AUX 92 loads V-memory only, and AUX
93 loads K-memory only.
AUX 98 loads forced word I/O and forced discrete I/O; AUX 99 loads forced
and unforced word I/O.
AUX 43 loads U-memory.
AUX 9497 loads S-memory types.
Executing Program
Loads
To load programs to the controller with AUX 43, and AUX 9099, use the
numeric keys to enter the AUX number that corresponds to the type of load
to be performed, then press Return .
After pressing Return , you receive the following display at the bottom of the
AUX menu. If you want the current program to be loaded, press YES-F2.
LOAD <memory type you selected> TO PLC FROM <current pgm name>?
NO-F1
YES-F2
545 LOADER1 PG
PGMS-F7
To change to another program, press PGMS-F7 and select the new program
name. Then press YES-F2.
11-7
11.4
To execute AUX 13, use the numeric keys to enter 13 at the AUX menu
prompt, then press Return .
When you receive the message, CLEAR PLC?, confirm by pressing YES-F2.
Clearing Memory
Types (AUX 3137,
41, 7477)
11-8
11.5
Saving Memory
Types (AUX 42,
6067)
Use AUX 42, and AUX 6067 to save specified types of memory data from
your controller to disk or directory.
NOTE: Your controller will list only the AUX numbers for the memory types
in that particular model. Not all memory types are available in all models.
To save memory data, type in the number of the AUX function at the AUX
menu prompt, then press Return .
AUX 42 and AUX 61-67 require that the selected program on disk memory
configuration be the same as that of the controller. If the configurations do
not match, the message, PLC MEMORY CONFIGURATION DOES NOT MATCH,
is displayed, and the AUX function does not complete.
Use AUX 60 to save a program from controller to the selected program on
disk. AUX 60 saves ladder memory, V-memory, K-memory, U-memory, Series
505 I/O configurations for all bases, PROFIBUS-DP I/O configurations for
all slaves, bus parameters for the PROFIBUS-DP I/O channel, memory
configuration, discrete elements, forced elements, scan time, and watchdog
timer value. To execute AUX 60, use the numeric keys to enter 60 at the
menu prompt, then press Return .
Executing Program
Saves
After pressing Return , you receive the following display at the bottom of the
AUX menu. If you want the controller memory saved to the current program
on disk, press YES-F2.
SAVE <memory type you selected> FROM PLC TO <current pgm name>?
545 LOADER1 PG
NO-F1
YES-F2
PGMS-F7
To change to another program, press PGMS-F7 and enter the new program
name. Then press YES-F2.
11-9
11.6
NOTE: Your controller will list only the AUX numbers for that particular
model. Not all AUX functions are available in all models.
Setting Watchdog
Timer (AUX 14)
Use AUX 14 to set the time-out on the controller watchdog timer. To invoke
the function, type in 14 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return .
To read the time, press READ-F2.
To enter a new time-out, type in the desired value at the prompt. The
minimum time-out supported by the controller is 500 ms. You can enter any
number between that and 32767. Press WRITE-F3 to enter the new value.
11-10
Use AUX 16 to set the number of task codes processed per scan for SF
modules on each channel. To invoke the function, type in 16 at the AUX
menu prompt and press Return .
The window display appears as shown in Figure 11-2. (Only numbers for the
channels you have configured are displayed; for example, if you have four
channels, the numbering goes to 4.)
Type in the number of task codes for SF modules per scan; use the arrow
keys to move from channel to channel. Press WRITE-F3 to enter the new
numbers.
To read current entries on the display, press READ-F2.
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
DIAGNOSTICS
SAVE PLC
LOAD PLC
CLEAR PLC
RESETS AND RESTARTS
MISCELLANEOUS
14.
16.
18.
19.
81.
83.
84.
85.
DIAGNOSTICS
WATCHDOG TIMER
TASK CODES PER SCAN
PLC TIME OF DAY
TASK CODES
SET PLC SCAN TIME
PER SCAN
PLC OPERATIONAL MODES
CHAN
T.C.
PORT LOCKOUT
1
8
EEPROM PROGRAMMING
PASSWORD OPERATIONS
545 LOADER1 PG
EXIT-F1
READ-F2 WRITE-F3
11-11
Use AUX 18 to read or set the date and time in the controller. To invoke the
function, type in 18 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return .
This invokes the following display.
11-12
11.7
Performing Controller Diagnostics (AUX 15, 20, 23, 27, 28, 29)
Use AUX 15 to read the software part number and the release number of
the cards installed in your controller. To invoke the function, type in 15 at
the AUX menu prompt and press Return .
The part number and release for each card, along with the slot number and
name of the card, displays as shown in Figure 11-3.
1
2
PART NUMBER
RELEASE
575
575
25966260200
25966260200
2.0
2.0
565 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1
READ-F2
11-13
Performing Controller Diagnostics (AUX 15, 20, 23, 27, 28, 29) (continued)
Show RBC Software
Part Number(s)
(AUX 23)
Use AUX 23 to display the RBC software part number(s) and release
number. To invoke the operation, type in 23 at the AUX menu prompt, and
press Return .
The RBC software number(s) and release number are displayed in the
format shown in Figure 11-4. The only editable field on this screen is the
channel number. To exit the function, press EXIT-F1.
BASE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
ACTIVE
PART NUMBER
RELEASE
25918100201
STANDBY
PART NUMBER
RELEASE
2.0.1
555 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1
READ-F2
11-14
Use AUX 27 to specify the failure class of cards in your controller. To invoke
the operation, type in 27 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return .
The PLC Card Failure Class displays as shown in Figure 11-5. To change
the failure class of a card, use the arrow keys to position the cursor in the
FAILURE CLASS field. Press F2 to change the class to either fatal or
non-fatal.
PLC CARD
FAILURE CLASS
CPU
FATAL
LOOP
FATAL
GLOBAL MEMORY
FATAL
RCC
FATAL
RCC
FATAL
565 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1
NONFATAL-F2
11-15
Performing Controller Diagnostics (AUX 15, 20, 23, 27, 28, 29) (continued)
Checking Memory
Availability
(AUX 28)
MEMORY AVAILABILITY
CONFIGURED
(BYTES)
USED
(BYTES)
AVAILABLE
(BYTES)
LADDER (L) . . . . . . . . .
32768
188
32580
COMPILED L (CL) . . . .
( 65536)
256
65280
SPECIAL (S) . . . . . . . . .
32768
66
32702
COMPILED SF (CS) . .
2048
124
1924
AVAILABLE
(WORDS)
16290
575 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1
Use AUX 29 to obtain the operational status from the controller. To invoke
the operation, type in 29 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return . The
operational status is then displayed in the format shown in Figure 11-7.
=
=
=
=
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
565 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1
11-16
11.8
Invoking the
Verification Menu
(AUX 17)
Use AUX 17 to compare the data on disk to that in the controller. To initiate
the operation, type in 17 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return . You
receive a display, Figure 11-8, for listing the types of memory to compare.
The memory configuration on disk and the controller must match to access
this function.
VERIFICATION FUNCTION
VERIFY
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
MEMORY
LADDER NETWORKS
FORCED WORD I/O
FORCED DISCRETE I/O
FORCED CONTROL RELAYS
SEQUENCER SCAN TIME
LOOPS
ANALOG ALARMS
SF PROGRAMS
SF SUBROUTINES
U-MEMORY
1
1
1
1
1
V-MEMORY
V-MEMORY
V-MEMORY
V-MEMORY
V-MEMORY
STATUS
MISMATCHED LOCATIONS
1
1
1
1
1
NO-F5
YES-F6
Use the arrow keys to position the cursor in the desired field. Type in Yes (or
use F6) in the VERIFY field to indicate that a memory type is to be checked.
You also enter a memory range for the V- and K-memory locations. After
entering Yes in the VERIFY field, use the right arrow key to position the
cursor for entering beginning and ending memory addresses for verification.
To select either V- or K-memory, press either V-F5 or K-F6. TISOFT checks
the range for V- and K-memory entries and corrects the highest entry to the
memory configuration you have.
If you want to display a compare screen that you have saved to disk,
press LOAD-F3.
11-17
When you have completed entries to the verification menu, press START-F4
to begin the compare.
Reading the
Compare Display
After the comparison is run, the STATUS field displays whether the
comparison passed or failed for each location you selected. You receive a
listing in the MISMATCHED LOCATIONS field of the ladder logic, V- or
K-memory, and forced elements that do not compare. Up to three
mismatched locations are displayed. If more than three mismatches exist,
three dots appear after the three locations displayed.
Since there is only one memory location for the controller scan time, a
passed or failed status is indicated by the message PASSED or FAILED. If
failure is indicated in the STATUS field, the number 1 also is listed in the
MISMATCHED LOCATIONS field.
11-18
11.9
Changing Scan
Time (AUX 19)
Use AUX 19 to set and read scan time for the controller. To invoke the AUX
19 menu, type in 19 at the AUX Functions menu prompt and press Return .
Complete the set of steps below for the controller model that you have.
Press FIXED-F3.
2.
3.
1.
Press VAR-F2.
2.
Figure 11-9 shows the display for setting scan time on the 545 controller.
VARIABLE
034
006
004
004
002
001
002
003
001
000
000
MS
MS
MS
MS
MS
MS
MS
MS
MS
MS
MS
005
003
003
002
MS
MS
MS
MS
EXIT-F1
(Present only
if supported
by controller)
READ ONLY
READ ONLY
READ ONLY
READ ONLY
545 NETDATA RN
VAR-F2 FIXED-F3 LIMIT-F4 READ-F5 WRITE-F6 RSTPKS-F7 TSCAN-F8
Figure 11-9 Scan Time Display for 545 Controller (AUX 19)
11-19
Press FIXED-F3.
2.
Position the cursor on the total scan time field and type in the desired
scan time.
3.
Press VAR-F2.
2.
Press LIMIT-F4.
2.
Position the cursor on the total scan time field and type in the desired
upper limit.
3.
Use the return or arrow keys to position the cursor on the time slice
field and type in the desired upper limit.
2.
After completing your changes, press WRITE-F6 to enter the time slices.
To reset the display of peak times for the total scan and the discrete portion
of the scan:
Press RSTPKS-F7.
To access AUX 16 to set the number of SF module task codes processed per
scan:
Press TSCAN-F8.
You receive the pop-up display just as you do in accessing the operation
from the Auxiliary Function menu. See the section on AUX 16 for more
details.
11-20
11.10
Use AUX 21 to run diagnostics on the I/O bases. To invoke the operation,
type in 21 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return . This invokes the
display shown in Figure 11-10. To run base diagnostics on one base,
complete the following steps:
1.
2.
Press RUNDIA-F8.
3.
2.
CHANNEL
BASE
MESSAGE
DIAGNOSTICS PASSED
RUNALL-F5
565 NETDATA RN
RUNDIA-F8
11-21
To locate the next dual media base after the channel and base number
entered at the prompt line, press NEXTDM-F2.
You receive a message either telling you no dual media was found or giving
you the next base number with dual media.
Swapping RBC
Roles
2.
Press SWPRBC-F3.
Use AUX 25 to determine the status of the I/O modules in your system. To
invoke the operation, type in 25 at the AUX menu prompt and press Return .
A listing of the modules is shown by channel, base, and slot number with
any failures indicated.
11-22
11.11
Performing Syntax
Check
Use AUX 22 to check your RLL program for errors that will prevent the
controller from entering RUN mode (such as UNKNOWN INSTRUCTION,
LADDER ELEMENT OUT OF RANGE, NO CORRESPONDING PAIR, or OUT OF
MEMORY). This Syntax Check is also available from various function key
menus. (Syntax Check is currently available only on 545, 555, and 575
controllers.)
To use AUX 22, enter 22 at the AUX menu prompt, or highlight Syntax
Check, and press Return . Syntax Check reports progress and lists any errors
found. (See Figure 11-11.) Up to 16 errors can be displayed on the Syntax
Check screen; if more than 16 errors are detected, the prompt line
announces ADDITIONAL ERRORS DETECTED. To display the additional
errors press MORE-F2.
If no errors are detected, Syntax Check reports PASSED on the prompt line.
SYNTAX CHECK
LABEL
ADDRESS
894
MESSAGE
EXIT-F1
11-23
11.12
Converting Files to
Binary
Using AUX 40
Type in 40 at the AUX menu prompt. You receive the File Selection Display
as shown in Figure 11-12.
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
TISOFT FILE SELECTION
DIAGNOSTICS
PATH: C:\TI\
SAVE PLC
DIAGNOSTICS
LOAD PLC
CLEAR PLC
S RECORD FILES
RESETS AND RESTARTS
PROGRAM2
MISCELLANEOUS
PROGRAM4
FILENAME: PROGRAM2
545 LOADER1 PG
SELECT-F8
YES-F2
545 LOADER1 PG
PGMS-F7
11-24
11.13
Changing
Operating Mode
(AUX 81)
Changing Ladder
Mode
LOOPS = PROG
When you position the cursor on the LADDER field, your options are then as
follows. (With no S-memory configured, the LADDER field is the only option
for changing program mode and no cursor is displayed.)
WARNING
Intelligent I/O modules (e.g., the 386/ATM module, the Programmable BASIC
module, the Servo Axis module, or the High Speed Pulse Input module) can
update outputs even when the controller is in PROGRAM mode, if your code
permits.
If an intelligent I/O module writes directly to an image register point, its write
takes precedence even when PGMFRZ/PGMOFF is in effect. This could cause
unexpected control action, resulting in death or serious injury to personnel,
and/or damage to equipment.
Do not write directly to output image register points from an intelligent I/O
module. Instead, write to a Control Relay or V-Memory location and have your
RLL program copy this location to the output point.
11-25
To select loop operating mode, position the cursor in the LOOPS field. You
then have the following options available.
PGM-F2 places the loop card in PROGRAM mode, and control blocks
are neither running nor being queued for running.
NOTE: Your loop card cannot be in PROGRAM mode while the discrete CPU
is in RUN mode.
HALT-F3 places the loop card in HOLD mode; enabled control blocks are
being queued to run, but are not running. Upon going to RUN mode,
execution resumes where it was halted.
RUN-F4 places the loop card in the RUN mode; enabled control blocks
are being queued and are running. When you press F4, you may receive
the message, PROFIBUS-DP IS STOPPED, CONTINUE TO PLC RUN
MODE?. Select either YES or NO.
The loop mode can either follow that of the discrete CPU or be in RUN mode
independent of the ladder program. To invoke this option, place the cursor
in the LOCKED or UNLOCKED field. Your function keys are then as follows.
11-26
UNLOCK-F2 frees the loop card for selection of RUN operating mode
independent of the ladder CPU.
LOCK-F3 locks the loop card to follow the operating mode selected for
ladders.
Selecting Hot
Backup Status
(AUX 82)
Use AUX 82 to select the status of a hot backup unit. To execute AUX 82,
use the numeric keys to enter 82 at the prompt in the AUX Functions menu.
Then press Return .
Press either ONLINE-F2 or SWITCH-F3 to select the status for your hot
backup configuration.
SWITCH-F3 switches the roles of the active unit and standby unit.
11-27
11.14
Programming Port
Lockout (AUX 83)
Use AUX 83 to prevent program changes from being made at different ports
simultaneously. To execute AUX 83, use the numeric keys to enter 83 at the
menu prompt, then press Return .
If the controller is locked, the display shows the Comm Port or the
address of the RBC port that executed the lock and gives the current
port or channel connection.
PLC IS LOCKED AT <PORT NAME> CURRENT: <PORT NAME>:
EXIT-F1 UNLOCK-F2
LOCK-F3
To unlock the controller, press UNLOCK-F2 from the port where the
lockout was initiated.
11-28
11.15
AUX 84 Functions
Selecting RAM or
EEPROM
From the AUX menu, complete the following steps to select either EEPROM
or controller RAM as your program source.
1.
Type in 84.
2.
Press
3.
Return
From the AUX menu, complete the following steps to copy the controller
RAM data to the EEPROM.
1.
Type in 84.
2.
Press
3.
4.
5.
Return
11-29
Erasing an EEPROM
11-30
Type in 84.
2.
Press
3.
4.
5.
Return
To erase an EEPROM, complete the following steps from the AUX menu.
1.
Type in 84.
2.
Press
3.
4.
Return
11.16
Password
Selection/Access
Level (AUX 85)
PASSWORD: DISABLED
FULL-F8 or FAllows you set the protection level of the controller for
full read/write access. This function does not work without a password.
11-31
11.17
AUX 86 Functions
To execute AUX 86, use the numeric keys to enter 86 at the prompt in the
AUX Functions menu. Then press Return . Figure 11-15 shows the
PROFIBUS-DP communications mode screen that is invoked with AUX 86.
SYNC-F5
ASYNCHRONOUS
555 NETDATA PG
ASYNC-F6
11-32
Chapter 12
12.2
12.3
12-2
12-2
12-2
12-3
12-3
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-4
12-5
12-5
Building a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-6
Building a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Building a Table from a Read Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Building a Free-Form Entry Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-6
12-6
12-7
12-1
12.1
Search and
Replace Functions
Invoking Search
and Replace Menu
You can use Global Search and Replace to perform the following functions.
Find and replace identifiers; for example, numbers, not types, for boxes
in ladders.
To access the menu, press REPLAC-F6 from the off-line ladder display.
Figure 12-1 shows the Global Search and Replace menu and prompt.
X0
X1
C1
Y2
1
C0
Y11
X1
C0
X1
Y7
6
X2
Y9
Y11
9
Y10
Y29
X2
15
12-2
Completing the
Prompt Fields
The first two fields, LADDER MEMORY RANGE: and THRU:, set the range for
your search. The starting range number must be less than or equal to the
ending range number. The REPLACE: field designates the element type and
identifier you are replacing. The entry in the WITH: field designates the
element type and identifier of the replacement element for the one
designated in the replace field. The replacement continues for the range you
indicated.
When you designate ladder memory type, the search defaults the first time
to the beginning and ending numbers of the network that the cursor is on.
For loops, alarms, and SF programs/subroutines, the search range is
corrected to the maximum number for each type if the number you enter
exceeds the maximum that can be programmed for each type.
No range-check is performed on the entry for the REPLACE: field. Range
checking is performed, however, on the entries you make in the WITH: field.
Replacing an
Element
At the prompt, first select memory type. To do this, press the function
key that corresponds to the desired memory type. Skip this step if your
controller does not have S-memory.
2.
3.
Use the right arrow key to position cursor in the field for THRU: to set
the search range.
4.
5.
Type in the element that will replace the designated element in the
WITH: field. (If needed, press \ or Shift ? for a list of valid element
types.)
6.
Press START-F8.
12-3
12.2
Enter memory type and memory range for the search operation at the
prompt displayed on the Search and Replace menu.
2.
Press BLDTBL-F7.
THRU
WITH
COPY COMMENTS: NO
REPLACE
THRU: 14
THRU
WITH
COPY SYNONYMS: NO
560 NETDATA
READ-F5 CLRLOC-F6
START-F8
To have the comments and synonyms copied from the replaced elements to
the new elements, use COMTGL-F2 to change the fields for copying
comments to read YES. Use SYNTGL-F3 to change the fields for copying
word, bit, and bit-of-word synonyms to read YES.
Clearing a Table
To clear a table, press CLRCHT-F4. Then press YES-F2. This clears all
entries from the table.
Clearing a
Location
To clear a location from the chart display, press CLRLOC-F6. This clears all
three fields of the line where the cursor is positioned.
12-4
Completing the
Table Fields
THRU
4
Y1 C11
WITH
C11
Y2 C12
START
F8
Y3 C13
Y4 C14
12-5
12.3
Building a Table
Building a Table
Your options for building a global search and replace table enable you to
create the table from free-form entries or from a read display of elements of
selected locations (which can also be edited).
Building a Table
from a Read
Display
To build your search and replace table from a read of a specified range and
memory type, complete the steps as listed below.
1.
Enter memory type and range for the table at the prompt displayed on
the Search and Replace menu.
The read is restricted to the range and memory type you set at the
menu prompt.
2.
Press BLDTBL-F7.
3.
12-6
4.
Completing the table from this point is free-form entry. You can now
edit the elements listed from the Read to fit your application.
5.
Building a
Free-Form Entry
Table
To build your search and replace table from elements that you type in,
complete the steps as listed below.
1.
Enter memory type and range for the table at the prompt displayed on
the Search and Replace menu.
2.
The replacement is restricted to the range and memory type you set at
the menu prompt.
3.
Press BLDTBL-F7.
4.
5.
12-7
Chapter 13
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13-2
13-2
13-3
Block Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-3
13-3
13-3
13-3
13-4
13-4
13-4
13-5
Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-5
13-5
13-6
Block Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Memory Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-6
13-6
13-6
13-6
13-6
13-7
13-7
13-7
13-8
Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-8
13-8
13-1
13.1
Types of Block
Functions
Loops
Analog Alarms
SF Programs
Title
SF Subroutines
13-2
13.2
Block Copy
In ladders, Block Copy inserts a copy of the source block of ladder rungs
before the rung that starts at the selected destination address. The rungs
starting at the destination address are moved to a higher address to make
room for the new rung(s). When copying the source block to a lower address,
after the copy, the source block parameters are adjusted to their new higher
addresses. The destination address cannot be within the source block range.
For V- or K-memory, Block Copy overwrites the data starting at the
destination address with data in the source block V- or K-memory
addresses. V- or K-memory formats are not copied.
For synonyms and comments, Block Copy also overwrites data starting at
the destination address with data from the source block.
Block Move
Block Move operates in the same manner as Block Copy, except that the
selected source block is deleted after it is copied to the destination block.
Block Delete
Block Put
Off-line for all memory types, Block Put copies a source memory block from
a selected source program to the destination memory block in the current
program.
On-line for Ladders, V-memory, and K-memory, Block Put copies a source
memory block from a selected source program to the destination memory
block in the controller. Conversely, using SRCTGL-F8 (source toggle),
Block Put copies a source memory block from the controller to the
destination memory block in a selected program.
Block Put of synonyms and comments online copies a source memory block
from a selected source program to the destination memory block in the
current program.
Block Put of a title copies the title from a source program to the current
program overwriting the current title, if any. If the source program does not
have a title, an error message, DISK FILE NOT FOUND, is displayed.
13-3
13.3
Accessing Ladder
Display Block
Functions
You can access block functions from the ladder display, either on- or off-line
by pressing BLOCK-F5. Figure 13-1 shows menu options after pressing
BLOCK.
BLOCK
ABORT
ABORT LADDER
COPY
MOVE
COM
(From Ladders)
DELETE
SYN
PUT
TITLE
SRCTGL
PUT Only
To invoke a block operation, enter the memory type, source starting and
ending addresses, and destination starting address.
The source addresses set the memory range of the block and the destination
address sets the starting point for the destination range of the block. For
block deletes, the destination address is not needed. For ladder memory, the
addresses are automatically adjusted to rung boundaries.
13-4
13.4
Block Parameters
After you select the desired block function, a prompt, such as that shown
below for the copy operation, appears for entering addresses to be acted on
by the function. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor through the address
parameters.
COPY LADDER RANGE: 00001
Memory
Block Type Type
THRU: 00001
Beginning Source
Address or
Identifier
Ending Source
Address or
Identifier
BEFORE: 00001
Destination
Address or
Identifier
WARNING
Entering Block
Parameters
Press BLOCK-F5.
2.
3.
For on-line PUT operations only, use SRCTGL-F8 to switch the source
and destination between controller-to-disk and disk-to-controller.
4.
5.
6.
Move the cursor to the BEFORE: field and type the destination address.
7.
Press
Return
If the selected address fields encompass an invalid source block (that is, the
starting address is greater than the ending address) or if the operation
would cause memory overflow, offline, you receive either the message
INVALID BLOCK PARAMETERS or BLOCK TOO LARGE TO FIT IN
PROGRAM.
13-5
13.5
Block Copy
Block Move
Block Move operates in the same manner as Block Copy except that the
selected source block is deleted after it is copied to the destination address.
Block Delete
Block Put
Off-line for all memory types, Block Put copies a source memory block from
a selected source program to the destination memory block in the current
program.
On-line for all memory types, Block Put copies a source memory block from
a selected source memory block to the destination memory block in the
controller. Conversely, using SRCTGL-F8 (source toggle), Block Put copies a
source memory block from the controller to the destination memory block in
a selected program.
S-Memory
Comments
13-6
Block functions for S-memory comments are available from the Ladder
Display Block functions.
13.6
Accessing
S-Memory Block
Operations
BLOCK
ABORT
COPY
MOVE
DELETE
PUT
PUT Only
ABORT
LOOP
ALARM
R/S
SFPGM
SFSUB
INSTR
SRCTGL
PUT Only
ABORT
SRCTGL
PUT Only
ABORT
SFPGM
SFSUB
SRCTGL
13-7
13.7
Block Parameters
After you select the desired block function, a prompt, such as that shown
below for the move operation, appears for entering identifiers to be acted on
by the function. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor through the
parameters. (The actual prompt line varies according to the memory type
selected.)
MOVE
LOOP: 0001
Block Type
Entering Block
Parameters
Memory
Type
Beginning
Identifier
THRU: 0001
TO LOOP: 0001
Ending
Identifier
Destination
Identifier
Press BLOCK-F3.
2.
3.
For on-line PUT operations only, use SRCTGL-F8 to switch the source
and destination between controller-to-disk and disk-to-controller.
4.
5.
At the memory type prompt, type in the beginning address of the block
to be acted on. Use the right arrow key to move to THRU: field and type
in the ending address of the source block.
6.
Move the cursor to the destination field and type in the destination
address.
7.
Press
Return
If the selected address fields encompass an invalid source block (that is, the
starting address is greater than the ending address) or if the operation
would cause S-memory overflow, you receive either the message INVALID
BLOCK PARAMETERS or S-MEMORY OVERFLOW.
13-8
Chapter 14
Printing
14.1
14-2
14.2
14-3
14.3
14-4
14-4
14-4
14-5
14-5
14-6
14-6
14-6
14.5
14-7
14.6
14-8
Cross-Reference Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross-Reference Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking Print Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing Cross-Reference Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Print Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Executing the Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-8
14-8
14-8
14-9
14-9
14-9
14.4
Printing
14-1
14.1
14-2
Printing
Print programs
(or selected addresses):
Print cross-reference:
(separate TISOFT
operating software)
14.2
PRINT SCREEN
545 LOADER1
EXIT-F1 EXECUTE-F2 SETUP-F3
Printing
14-3
14.3
Accessing Print
Menus
EXIT
ABORT SUSPEND
EXECUTE SETUP
EXIT READDK
EXIT
READDK WRITDK
WRITDK
PRTCTL
RDDATE
DELETE INSERT
SEND
The Print Selection Menu, shown in Figure 14-3, appears after you press
PRINT-F1. Select the data types to print from this menu.
Y/N
FROM
TO
TITLE:
. ......................
MEMORY CONFIGURATION: . . . . . . .
LADDERS: RANGE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INLINE XREF (EXC CR):
SKIP NOPS: . . . . . . . . . . .
ELEMENT USAGE TABLE: . . . . . . . . . .
N
N
N
N
N
N
000001
00000
016384
00000
V-MEMORY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K-MEMORY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-MEMORY:LOOPS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANALOG ALARMS: . . . . .
SF PROGRAMS: . . . . . . .
SF SUBROUTINES: . . . . .
N
N
N
N
N
N
000001
000000
01
001
0001
0001
026624
000000
64
128
1023
1023
N
N
I/O CONFIGURATION:
505 CHANNEL, BASE: . .
PROFIBUS-DP SLAVE: . .
SYNONYMS:I/O ELEMENTS: . . . . . . . .
CONTROL RELAYS: . . . .
SKP/LBL/GTS/SBR: . . . . .
JMP/MCR/END: . . . . . . . .
N
N
N
N
N
N
1 00
001
0001
00001
001
1 15
112
8192
32768
255
N
N
N
N
N
N
565 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1 EXECUTE-F2 SETUP-F3
READDK-F5 WRITDK-F6
14-4
Printing
Print Selection
Options
Entering Print
Selections
The options on the Print Selection menu provide you with program
documentation as described below.
Ladders: Gives you a copy of the ladder program within the address
range you specify. Synonyms, descriptors and comments are included if
you indicate YES in the Syn, Des, and Com fields.
Inline XREF: Lists the address of the first occurrence where an input is
used as an output in each rung; performs a full cross-reference for each
output. It also allows you to exclude a range of control relays in the
cross reference.
Skip NOPS: Allows you to not print NOPS within your ladder program.
I/O Configuration: Gives you a copy of the I/O configuration for each
Series 505 base and/or PROFIBUS-DP slave, with synonyms (if
selected). Unused bases and slaves are not printed.
Use the arrow keys to position your cursor from field to field to select the
desired print options.
The Y/N field is one character long. Indicate the parameters for printing by
typing in Y at the selected element type.
The FROM and TO fields vary in size with memory type, and size is indicated
by length of the cursor when it is positioned on the field. Indicate memory
locations to be printed by typing in the numbers for the range to be printed.
Indicate whether synonyms, descriptors, and comments are to be included
in the printout by completing the SYN, DES, and COM fields. Enter a Y in
each of the fields to be printed.
Printing
14-5
14.4
The Print Setup Menu is available after choosing a print function. Press
SETUP-F3 to invoke the Print Setup menu (Figure 14-4).
Select the desired options from the menu by using the return and arrow
keys to position the cursor in the correct column to make the selections. For
the PAGE HEADER, LINES PER PAGE, STARTING PAGE NUMBER, and
FILENAME fields, position the cursor in the correct field and type in the
desired parameters.
PAGE HEADER:
COLUMNS: (80 132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
LINES PER PAGE: (50 TO 132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
STARTING PAGE NUMBER: (1 TO 9999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
DATE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 000000
USE EXTENDED ASCII CHARACTER SET: (YES NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES
FORM FEED: (YES NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES
PRINT LINE FEED ON CARRIAGE RETURN: (YES NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . YES
PRINT OUTPUT: (PRINTER FILE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINTER
FILE NAME: PRFILE.LIS
545 LOADER1
EXIT-F1 READDK-F2 WRITDK-F3 PRTCTL-F4 RDDATE-F5
14-6
Printing
Use the function keys available on the Setup menu to make your selections.
Each of the keys perform operations as indicated below.
Press RDDATE-F5 to read date from the PC system clock and display it
in the date field of the Print Setup menu for inclusion in the printout.
14.5
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
359
>
a
>
01234567890
123456789
123456789
01234567890
123456789
123456789
01234567890
123456789
123456789
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
C1
C1
C1
>
a
>
01234567890 01234567890
123456789
123456789
123456789
123456789
C1
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
>
c
>
>
c
>
01234567890
123456789
123456789
C1
01234567890
123456789
123456789
Y2
Printing
14-7
14.6
Cross-Reference
Options
Cross-Reference
Contents
Invoking Print
Cross-Reference
Y/N
N
N
N
N
N
N
I/O ELEMENTS:
CONTROL RELAYS:
EXCLUDE CR:
V MEMORY:
K MEMORY:
RLL BOXES:
STATUS WORDS:
DRUM/TIMER VARIABLES:
SF ERROR CODES:
LOOP/ALARM VARIABLES:
WITH SYNONYMS:
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
FROM
TO
000001
01
001
0001
0001
0012000
64
128
1023
1023
0001
00001
00000
000001
000000
1023
1023
00000
005120
000000
545 NETDATA PG
EXIT-F1 EXECUTE-F2 SETUP-F3 TITLE-F4 READDK-F5 WRITDK-F6
14-8
Printing
Completing
Cross-Reference
Menu
To enter the desired options for cross-reference, use the arrow keys to
position the cursor in the fields.
The Y/N field is one character long. Indicate the parameters for printing by
typing in Y at the selected element type.
The FROM and TO fields vary in size with memory type, and size is indicated
by length of the cursor when it is positioned on the field. Indicate memory
locations to be printed by typing in the numbers for the range to be printed.
Setting up Print
Parameters
If you need to change the print parameters, press SETUP-F3 to access the
Print Setup Menu. (See Section 14.4.)
Make the desired changes and press WRITDK-F3 if you want the changes
saved to disk.
Executing the
Printout
Printing
14-9
Appendix A
Menu Maps
The menu listings in this appendix show the primary functions as accessed
from the Ladder Display (illustrated below). The listings are in alphabetical
order.
On-Line, Off-Line
Ladder Displays
The first line of function keys shown below represents the Start-up Screen
function keys.
EXIT
EXIT
EDIT
FIND
HINTS
DOCUM
ONLINE
BLOCK
AUX
COLOR
STATUS
PGMS
OFFLINE
CHART
SPACEBAR (+)
EXIT
EDIT
FIND
LOOP
DOCUM
ALARM
BLOCK
SFPGM
LOOP
ALARM
SFPGM
The last menu map in this appendix is the separate TISOFT operating
software, Print Cross-Reference.
Menu Maps
A-1
ALARM
ALARM
EXIT
SHOW
BLOCK
EN/DIS
PG/RN
LOOP
ALARM SFPGM
On-Line Only
EXIT
EDIT
COMMNT
ABORT
EN/DIS
COMMNT ENTER
Vary with cursor position
to display valid options.
AUX
AUX
EXIT
A-2
Menu Maps
TITLE
(On-Line Only)
PGMS
BLDCHT
BLDCHT
EXIT
EXIT
DIRECT
LF>RT
ASCII
RT>LF TP>BM
CLRCHT
CLRLOC
RDCHT WRCHT
ABORT SWAP
ENTER
SPACEBAR (+)
HEX
BIN
INT
+/
BLOCK
(From Ladders)
BLOCK
ABORT
ABORT LADDER
COPY
TMR1MS
(From Ladders)
MOVE
DELETE
COM
SYN
PUT
TITLE
SRCTGL
PUT Only
Menu Maps
A-3
BLOCK
ABORT
ABORT
LOOP
COPY
ALARM
MOVE
R/S
DELETE
SFPGM
PUT
SFSUB
INSTR
SRCTGL
PUT Only
PUT Only
ABORT
SRCTGL
ABORT
SFPGM
SFSUB
SRCTGL
PUT Only
CHART
CHART
EXIT
EXIT
CHGVAL
READ
BLDCHT
SEEK
PG/RN
FORCE
S.SCAN
UNFORC
(On-Line Only)
SYNTGL
RDCHT
UN.ALL
STATUS
WRITE
SPACEBAR (+)
HEX
A-4
Menu Maps
BIN
INT
+/
DOUBLE
REAL
TMR.1S
TMR1MS
CONFIO
(Series 505)
CONFIO
EXIT
CONFIG
EN/DIS PRO-DP
FIND
CONFIG
(On-Line)
READBS
CLRBS
COMPAR EN/DIS
SPACEBAR (+)
FIND
EXIT SYNTGL
EXIT NEXT
CONFIG
EXIT
(Off-Line)
EN/DIS
DELCHN
CLRBS
EXIT SYNTGL
Menu Maps
A-5
CONFIO
(PROFIBUS-DP)
CONFIO
EXIT
CONFIG
(On-Line)
505IO
OPR/ST
DELETE
CONFIO
CONFIG
EXIT
SHOW
READDK
CONFIG
EDIT
UPDATE
FIND
MERGE EN/DIS
505IO
DELETE
(On-Line)
READPC
FIND
EXIT SYNTGL
EXIT
(Off-Line)
CONFIG
(Off-Line)
EDIT
EXIT NEXT
EXIT SYNTGL
EDIT
EXIT
READDK
WRITDK
(On-Line)
SPACEBAR (+)
X<>WX
Y<>WY
CMPACT UNIFY
RESTOR
EXIT
EDIT
READRM
WRITRM
X<>WX
Y<>WY
(Off-Line)
EN/DIS
SPACEBAR (+)
UPDATE
ABORT
A-6
Menu Maps
CMPACT UNIFY
RESTOR
(On-Line Only)
CONT
CONFME
CONFME
EXIT
READDK
WRITDK
READPC
WRITPC
CONFME
EXIT READRM
WRITRM
545
(On-Line)
545L
REQAPP
(Off-Line)
575
555
REQAPP
SPACEBAR (+)
520
530
520C 530C
525/35
560/565
COLOR
COLOR
Menu Maps
A-7
DOCUM
DOCUM
EXIT
COM
SYN
TITLE
COM
EXIT
IMPORT EXPORT
SETUP
ABORT
RECOVR
DELLN
INSLN
EDIT
RETURN
DELETE ENTER
COMPSE
SYN
EXIT
IMPORT EXPORT
SETUP
ABORT
RECOVR
DELLN INSLN
FIND
RETURN
DELETE DESCR
SYN
TITLE
ABORT
DELLN
INSLN
EDIT
DELETE ENTER
COMPSE
A-8
Menu Maps
EDIT
(On- and Off-Line),
except PG/RN On-Line Only
EDIT
EXIT
| |
|/|
( )
(/)
|R|(I)
BOX
PG/RN
SPACEBAR (+)
HORZ
VERT
HORZD
VERTD
ABORT
ROW
COL
INSMOD
RUNG
AUTORN
|R|(I)
ABORT
<>
<
>=
>
<=
SPACEBAR (+)
ABORT
| I |
| I / |
( I )
( I / )
(SETI)
(RSTI)
FIND
FIND
EXIT
ADDR
NOP
NXTIN
WDBTGL OUTTGL
Menu Maps
A-9
LOOP
LOOP
On-Line Only
EXIT
SHOW
BLOCK
EXIT
EXIT
EDIT
EN/DIS
R/S
PG/RN
EDIT
ALARM
SFPGM
WRITE
EN/DIS
COMMNT EN/DIS
ABORT
COMMNT ENTER
Vary with cursor position
to display valid options.
Memory Editor
Access V-memory editor by pressing Ctrl V;
access K-memory editor by pressing Ctrl K.
EXIT
FIND
CTRL V / CRTL K
STRING SYNTGL
FMTGL
READ
WRITE
SPACEBAR (+)
HEX
A-10
Menu Maps
BIN
INT
+/
DOUBLE
REAL
TMR.1S TMR1MS
PG/RN
PG/RN
EXIT
PGMFRZ
PGMOFF
(On-Line Only)
RUN
OPR/ST
SYNTAX
OR
Access available by
pressing arrow keys
only when S-memory
is configured.
EXIT
PGM
HALT
RUN
SYNTAX
OPR/ST
SYNTAX
OR
EXIT UNLOCK LOCK
Operate/Stop and
Synchronous/Asynchronous
apply only to PROFIBUS-DP
I/O communications.
OPR/ST
EXIT
OPR/ST
OPER
STOP
SYNC
ASYNC
PGMS
PGMS
ABORT
COPY
EXIT
MKDIR
DELETE RENAME
RMDIR
FORMAT
DIR
FLDTGL
SELECT
FLDTGL
SELECT
Menu Maps
A-11
PRINT
PRINT
EXIT
EXECUTE
SETUP
READDK
WRITDK
ABORT SUSPEND
A-12
Menu Maps
QUIT
EXIT READDK
EXIT
WRITDK
DELETE INSERT
PRTCTL
RDDATE
SEND
REPLACE
REPLAC
ABORT
LADDER LOOP
ABORT COMTGL
SYNTGL
SF Program and SF
Subroutine
ALARM
SFPGM
CLRCHT
READ
SFPGM
(Off-Line)
SFSUB
BLDTBL
CLRLOC
START
START
On-Line Only
EXIT
SHOW
BLOCK
DIS/CP
PG/RN
LOOP
ALARM
SFSUB
SFPGM
EXIT
Access available in
edit mode before
editing.
EDIT
EXIT
FIND
DELST
INSST
COMMNT
DIS/CP
FIND
DELST
INSST
COMMNT
DIS/CP
OR
Access available in
edit mode while
editing.
ABORT
ENTER
OR
DELLN
ABORT
INSLN
EDIT
ENTER
COMPSE
FIND
DIS/CP
EXIT
ENABLE
DISABL
COMPIL
NOCMPL
ABORT STMTNO
INSTR
ELEMNT
Menu Maps
A-13
STATUS
STATUS
EXIT CHGVAL
FIND
PG/RN
S.SCAN
(On-Line Only)
SELECT
CHART
SPACEBAR (+)
COMTGL
EXIT
CLEAR
NEXT
RDTBL
SYNTGL
WRTBL
ENTER
OR
Accessed by
Arrow Keys
EXIT
CLEAR
CURRNT
SELCHT
RDTBL
WRTBL ENTER
RDTBL
WRTBL ENTER
OR
EXIT
CHGVAL
EXIT
READ
SEEK
FORCE UNFORC
(On-Line Only)
UN.ALL
WRITE
SPACEBAR (+)
HEX
A-14
Menu Maps
BIN
INT
+/
DOUBLE
REAL
TMR.1S TMR1MS
Print
Cross-Reference
Operating Software
PRINT
CROSSREF
EXIT
EXIT
ABORT
SUSPEND
ABORT
PAGE
ONLINE
HINTS
EXECUTE
EXIT
RESUME
SETUP
READDK
QUIT
PGMS OFFLINE
COLOR
TITLE
WRITDK
EXIT
READDK
PRTCTL
WRITDK
RDDATE
DELETE INSERT
SEND
Menu Maps
A-15
Appendix B
TISOFT Messages
This appendix contains a listing of programming error messages that may
be displayed on the TISOFT screen when you attempt various functions.
The messages are a guide to help you in correcting error conditions.
The following symbols are used:
aaaannnn
xxxx
hh
#####
a
If an error occurs that you cannot resolve, please call your Siemens
Energy & Automation distributor or sales office in the U.S. for assistance.
Alarm Variable
Required
Application Is
Undefined or
Unassigned
Arithmetic Error
Detected
Arithmetic Overflow
Attempt to Access a
Real-only Variable as
an Integer
Attempt to Access an
Access the variable as an integer value.
Integer-Only Variable as
a Real
Attempt to Divide by
Zero
Attempt to Execute
Cyclic Statement in
Non-Cyclic SFPGM
TISOFT Messages
B-1
Attempt to Modify
Control Block Control
Information
Attempt to Write a
Read-Only Variable
An attempt was made to edit the value of a read-only variable via the
CHGVAL operation under STATUS or CHART.
Attempted to Write to a
Protected Variable
Cannot write to protected variables, such as TCC and TCP until you
unlock the CPU keylock.
Attempted Write
Operation Did Not
Verify
Automatic Rung
InsertOff
Indicates that RUNG INSERT mode is inactive. This is the default. See
also: Automatic Rung InsertOn.
Automatic Rung
InsertOn
Indicates that RUNG INSERT mode is active. This mode is used to enter
a series of rungs before existing ladder logic rungs. After pressing
ENTER-F8 to enter a rung, a new blank rung is created. To toggle this
mode on/off, press INSERT-F8, AUTORN-F6 in ladder edit.
Bit-of-Word
Not Allowed
Bit-of-Word Required
Bottom of Screen
When you use the down arrow to scroll through a status chart with
synonyms, this message indicates that the bottom of the chart is on the
screen.
Box Accesses
Unconfigured
CR Range
The box just created in RLL implicitly refers to a Control Relay which is
out of range for the current configuration. Either reduce the length of the
table of Control Relays in the box, or move the starting table address to a
CR that can accommodate the length of the table, or increase your I/O
configuration to accommodate the extra Control Relays.
Box Crosses
Global/Local
CR Boundary
The box just created in RLL contains a table of Control Relays which
spans the boundary between Global and Internal Control Relays. The
table must fit entirely within either the Global CR range (C1-C8192) or
the Internal CR range (C8193-C56320)not both.
Box Parameter
Overflow at
Address ######
The box just created in RLL implicitly refers to a memory address which
is out of range for the current configuration. Either reduce the length of
the table in the box, or move the starting table address to a memory
address that can accommodate the length of the table, or increase your
configuration to accommodate the table range.
B-2
TISOFT Messages
The controller does not support the ability to find the requested element.
Channels 1 and 2
Cannot Be Deleted
Comment Cannot Be
Tied to Element in
Network
This message is displayed during edit of ladder logic when the Comment
editor (COMMNT-F7) is invoked for an output type that does not have a
comment associated with it, for example, NOP, RTN.
Communications Error
Data received from the controller has been corrupted or lost, perhaps due
to a COMM PORT failure. If using TISTAR, Model 20 or Model 70, exit
TISOFT, check the cable connection between the DEU and the Operator
Station, and reenter TISOFT.
Communications Error
Break Error
Data received from the controller has been corrupted or lost, perhaps due
to a COMM PORT failure.
Communications Error
Overrun Error
Data received from the controller has been corrupted or lost, perhaps due
to a COMM PORT failure.
Communications Error
Parity Error
Data received from the controller has been corrupted or lost, perhaps due
to a COMM PORT failure.
Communications Error
Port Does Not Exist
The selected COMM PORT does not exist. Try a different port.
Communications
Error Number hh
Communications
Terminated by User
Communications
Timeout
Comparison Equal
TISOFT Messages
B-3
Comparison Not Equal Comparison of the I/O Configuration in the Base with the I/O
Failed Module in Base Configuration in the controller has failed; configurations are not the
same. Slots which failed are highlighted on the screen display. In
addition, a failed module has been detected in the basewhich may have
caused the comparison to fail.
Connection to
Element Missing
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not
valid. An example appears below.
C1
C2
Constant Value
Required
Control Block
Already Exists
Control Block
Does Not Exist
Control Block
Is Disabled
Control Block
Is Not Disabled
Control Block
Number out of Range
Control Block
Size Error
Data in a TISOFT program file has been corrupted, leaving the file in an
unrecoverable state. This error may result if an AUX SAVE or BLOCK
PUT PLCDK operation fails due to loss of communications. A power
failure or popping the disk drive during writes to disk may also cause
data corruption. To recover, retry the operation that failed. If all else
fails, delete the <pgmname>.VP5 file from DOS and redo the operation.
Note: deleting <pgmname>.VP5 will erase your ladder logic, memory
and I/O configurations.
Current Value
Cursor Not
Positioned Properly
B-4
TISOFT Messages
Make sure the directory containing the TISOFT operating software files
is in the path.
DEU TIWAY
Communication Error
Diagnostics Failed
upon Powerup
This occurs when you try to delete a directory that still contains files.
Delete the files in the directory first.
This error occurs during a disk operation when either the source or
destination directory becomes inaccessible while TISOFT internally
switches directories. Perhaps the directory has been deleted or the disk
drive has been popped open.
An attempt to open a TISOFT program file has failed because the file
does not exist. Perhaps the file has been accidentally deleted.
An attempt to write to a file has failed because the file, which was
previously opened successfully, has been unexpectedly closed.
Disk Full
This message occurs when you attempt to write data to the disk, and
there is no more room on the disk to store data. User must make room on
the disk either by deleting documentation or program data OFFLINE, or
by exiting TISOFT and deleting non-TISOFT files.
An attempt to write to a TISOFT program file has failed because the file
or the disk is write protected. Remove the write protection mechanism
and try the operation again.
TISOFT Messages
B-5
An attempt to access the disk has failed. Perhaps the disk drive has been
popped open, or a disk hardware failure has occurred.
Duplicate SBR
Reference
The specified subroutine (SBR) number has been declared more than
once in the RLL program.
Element Address
Corrected to Valid
Boundary
The element address was adjusted to a legal value for the controller.
Element Cannot Be
Displayed in This
Format
Element Forced
This message indicates that the requested element has been successfully
forced to the specified value.
Element Must Be on
an 8-Point Boundary
The box just created in RLL contains an element address which must be
on an 8-point boundary; for example, C1, C9, C17, etc. Change the
indicated element ID number to a valid 8-point boundary value.
B-6
TISOFT Messages
THRU
C100
WITH
C2000
Element Range
Crosses Invalid
Boundary
This message occurs if you attempt to create a rung that exceeds the
maximum number of elements allowed per rung (120 contact-sized
nodes). To correct the entry, either delete some ladder elements, or break
the logic into two rungs. Elements require node sizes as listed below.
Contact = 1 node
2 x 3 box = 6 nodes
7 x 8 box = 56 nodes
Coil = 1 node
3 x 3 box = 9 nodes
4 x 7 box = 28 nodes
2 x 7 box = 14 nodes
The specified element type is an invalid type for the current field. Press
the \ or Shift ? keys to display a screen listing valid element types for
the current field.
Element Unforced
This message indicates that the requested element has been successfully
unforced.
Element within
Invalid Range
Empty Parameter
Cannot Be before
Another Parameter
This message is displayed when you edit parameter fields in either the
SFSUB box in RLL (P1-P5), or the CALL (P1-P5), PACKLOOP
(PARAMETERS:), or PACKAA (PARAMETERS:) SF statements in an SF
Program or Subroutine. The parameter fields must be programmed in
order. For example, this error message will be displayed if the P2 field is
programmed while the P1 field has been left blank.
End of Memory
This message indicates that the end of the valid memory range has been
reached, for example, when you page up or down in RLL or V/K memory
editor.
Entry Required
at This Field
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, a conditional block or the block
INSTxxx Block
bracketed by a LABEL GOTO pair is larger than 32K when compiled.
Exceeds 32K
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, SF compiled code exceeded
INSTxxx CS-Memory
configured CS-memory.
Overflow
TISOFT Messages
B-7
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, a duplicate label definition was
INSTxxx Duplicate
found.
Label
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, the expression was too complex.
INSTxxx Expression
Too Complex
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, the control block size was invalid
INSTxxx Invalid
in S-memory.
Control Blk Size
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, the referenced statement was
INSTxxx Invalid
invalid in a compiled SF program or subroutine.
Instruction
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, an expression contained an
INSTxxx Invalid
invalid operation.
Operation in EXP
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, a reference to an invalid SFSUB
INSTxxx Invalid
number was encountered.
SFSUB Number
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, an undefined or invalid variable
INSTxxx Invalid
address was encountered. Either the address is misformed, out of range,
Variable Address
or specifies a variable that is invalid in the context of its use.
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, the maximum IF nesting was
INSTxxx Max IF
exceeded.
Nesting Exceeded
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, the maximum number of label
INSTxxx Max Label
definitions was exceeded.
Count Exceeded
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, a syntax error was encountered,
INSTxxx Syntax Error indicating that there is a problem with the content of S-memory.
Error Compiling aaannn When compiling an SFPGM or SFSUB, an undefined label was
LABEL xxx Undefined encountered.
Label
Error Creating File
Error Deleting
from Disk
TISOFT attempted to delete a file from the disk and failed. The file may
be write-protected, or may have been accidentally deleted; the disk drive
may have been popped open; or a disk hardware failure may have
occurred.
B-8
TISOFT Messages
Error Reading
from Disk
TISOFT attempted to read a program file and failed. This can occur if
the system attempts to open too many files simultaneously. Make sure
the command FILES=20 is in the CONFIG.SYS file. Or, you might need
to increase the maximum number of open files allowed to FILES=25 or
FILES=30.
If the problem persists, the file may have been accidently deleted, the
disk drive may have been popped open, data in the file may have been
corrupted, or a disk hardware failure may have occurred.
Error Replacing
aaaannnn with
aaaannnn at
Address #####
Error Replacing
aaaannnn with
aaaannnn at Alarm xxx
Error Replacing
aaaannnn with
aaaannnn at Loop xxx
Error Replacing
aaaannnn with
aaaannnn at
Loop xxx R/S xxx
Error Replacing
Element at
Address #####
Error Replacing
Element at SFPGM
xxxx INST xxxxx
Error Replacing
Element at SFSUB
xxxx INST xxxx
TISOFT Messages
B-9
An invalid baud rate has been used with TISTAR (Model 20 or Model
70).
TISOFT attempted to write a program file and failed. This can occur if
the system attempts to open too many files simultaneously. Ensure that
the command FILES=20 is in your CONFIG.SYS file.
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not
valid. See following example.
C1
END
This message occurs ONLINE when the controller goes into a Fatal
Error mode. Use AUX 29 to determine the cause of the error.
FIFO Is Incompatible
with FTSR-IN or
FTSR-OUT Statement
FIFO Is Invalid
This message is displayed when the file name specified already exists. In
FILE CONVERSION, specify a different program name to create. In the
PRINT TO FILE option, you can choose either to replace the file, append
to the end of the file, or to abort and select a different file name.
File or Directory
Already Exists
Forcing Functions
Cannot Be Used with
This Element
The force, unforce, and seek operations under STATUS and CHART are
available only for X, Y, C, WX, and WY element types.
The given error number has occurred on the FMS network. The code
number gives a detailed description of the error.
From Boundary
The starting range specified in the PRINT ALL and PRINT
Exceeds To Boundary CROSS-REFERENCE selections menu must be less than or equal to the
ending range for the given option.
FTSR-In SF Statement
Performed on Full
Shift Register
FTSR-Out SF Statement Put data in register (FTSR-IN) before attempting to take out.
Performed on Empty
Shift Register
Function Not Available
Load-Only Version
The selected write function is not available because this mode of TISOFT
is read-only except for the following Aux functions: 10, 11, 12, 13, 20, 81,
86, 90, 98, and 99.
B-10
TISOFT Messages
High-High Must Be
Greater than or
Equal to High
An error has occurred with the TIWAY network. Refer to the TIWAY
users manual for the definition of the given error code.
Illegal Connection
around Box
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not
valid. See following example. Box instructions may be ANDed, but may
not be STRed or ORed.
C1
C3
BITC1
A: V1
N= 1
C2
Illegal Connection to
Multiple Input Box
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not
valid. Each input of a multiple input box cannot have ORed contacts or
more than two ANDed contacts. See example.
C1
C2
TMR1
C3
P=0.1
C4
Illegal Connection to
Multiple Input Box at
Address ######
TISOFT Messages
B-11
Illegal Instruction
at Address #####
Illegal Memory
Configuration
Illegal Network
This error should not occur except under extenuating circumstances. The
network just entered contains an error that TISOFT does not recognize.
Attempt to edit and re-enter the network with valid ladder logic.
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that contains
more than 32 contact-sized elements in parallel.
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that contains
more than 32 contact-sized elements in series.
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that contains
more than 32 contact-sized elements in series and/or in parallel.
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that contains
more than 32 contact-sized elements in series and/or in parallel.
This message indicates that the user has attempted to use a non-Series
500/505 program during TISOFT operations. Make sure the selected
Program Disk/Directory used for OFFLINE, AUX SAVE/LOAD, BLOCK
PUT, FILE CONVERSION operations, etc., is a Series 500/505 Program.
Illegal Request in
Current Operational
Mode
Incorrect Amount of
Data Sent with Request
Task code length field does not agree with number of characters sent.
B-12
TISOFT Messages
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not
valid. An example appears below.
END
C
Instruction Number
out of Range
Invalid Action
Invalid Block
Parameters
Invalid Code
Invalid Context
This is an internal TISOFT error and should not occur under normal
usage. The TISOFT help system files may have been corrupted.
The data in the selected file contains invalid data or has an invalid data
format. Make sure the data in the file is correct.
Invalid Directory
This error occurs if the specified directory path does not exist.
Invalid Drive
TISOFT Messages
B-13
This message is displayed when the user specifies an element type that
is illegal for the current field. Press the \ or Shift ? keys to display a
screen listing valid element types for the current field.
Also, during definition of ranges for the Global Search and Replace
operation, this message indicates that the user has specified an illegal
element type to replace another. For example, replacing an X address
with a V address is not permitted.
Invalid Expression
Invalid Instruction in
Subroutine
Invalid Location
Invalid Network
Address
Invalid Operator in an
Expression
B-14
TISOFT Messages
Invalid Parameter
Invalid SF Program
Type
During edit of a LOOP table, this message indicates that the SPECIAL
CALCULATION option has been selected, but the SF Program number
has not been specified. Enter a valid SF Program number in the
SPECIAL FUNCTION field.
Invalid SF Statement
Size Specified
Keylock or Password
Protect Error
The selected TISOFT operation did not work because the password is
enabled or the password operation is not allowed. The CPU keylock can
also cause this message.
Ladder Element
Required Parameter
Missing
TISOFT Messages
B-15
Loop Card in Run Mode This message is displayed to alert the user who presses the EN/DIS key
to enable or disable an S-memory Control Block while the Special
Function CPU (LOOP) card is in RUN mode.
Loop Variable Required
Loop xxx
Not Programmed
The requested LOOP control block has not been programmed and is not
included in the LOOP DIRECTORY. An unprogrammed control block
cannot be enabled or disabled. To create the LOOP, type in the desired
ID number and press SHOW-F2.
Maximum Number of
Elements Exceeded
Maximum Number of
Points Exceeded
Maximum SF
Subroutine Nesting
Level Exceeded
B-16
TISOFT Messages
Missing Required
Application a
Mode-Lock Application
Refusal by a
The requested mode change has been denied by this list of applications.
a represents a list of application IDs.
Modified Values
Entered
Module in Slot xx Is
Already Configured by
Application a
An element has been used in the output column which must be the only
output in the rung. Remove the other outputs from the rung.
Network Contains
Extra STR Element
at Address ######
This message indicates that the rung at the specified address contains
invalid Boolean stack logic. It contains an extra element with a STR
attribute. Edit the rung and delete the extra STORE element.
Network Contains
Invalid Large Box
at ######
This message indicates that a large box (superbox) used in the specified
rung address cannot be drawn at screen position (1,3) because the
network is too complex. Edit and simplify the network.
Network Contains
Invalid Multiple Input
Box at ######
This message indicates that a multiple input box used in the specified
rung address cannot be drawn at screen position (1,3) because the
network is too complex. Edit and simplify the network.
Network Contains
Invalid Output at
Address ######
This message indicates that the rung at the specified address contains a
midline output (coil or out box) followed by more input logic (contacts).
Edit the rung and remove any midline output elements.
TISOFT Messages
B-17
Network Contains
No Coils
at Address ######
This message indicates that the rung at the specified address contains no
coils. Edit the rung and define one or more coils, or delete the rung. Also,
contact or box data may be missing.
Network Contains No
Cross Referencable
Elements
Network Driver
Not Installed
The H1 TSR driver has not been installed. TISOFT cannot communicate
over the H1 network until it is installed.
Network Missing
STR Element
at Address ######
This message indicates that the rung at the specified address contains
invalid Boolean stack logic. It is missing an element with an STR
attribute. Edit the rung and add the required STORE element.
Network Was
Not Deleted
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not
valid. See the following example.
C1
C2
C3
C11
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
Note: Up to 16 levels for 555 only. All other controllers allow up to 8 levels.
B-18
TISOFT Messages
No Forced I/O of
Type Found
No K-Memory
Configured
No Response from
the PLC
No Response from
Special Function
Module
No U-Memory
Configured
Operating
System Error Detected
Operation Complete
Operation Failed
This message indicates a problem has occurred when you use AUX 84
EEPROM programming.
TISOFT Messages
B-19
Out of Memory
This message indicates that the current controller configuration does not
support Hot Back Up (HBU).
The controller does not support the function that TISOFT tried to
execute.
PLC Is Locked
Invalid Operation
Use AUX 83 from the port that performed the lock to unlock all ports.
PLC Memory
Configuration Does Not
Match
PLC Memory
Configuration Is
Smaller than Disk
Parameter out of Range If you are editing parameters in an SFSUB box in RLL, or SF statements
in an SF Program/Subroutine, this message indicates that the specified
parameter is out of the valid range for the current field. If specifying an
element address (for example, V5121 or C2049), the address exceeds the
current memory or I/O configuration for the element type. If specifying a
constant value, the value is either less than the minimum, or greater
than the maximum value expected.
Port Configuration Not
Supported from This
Connection
While using TISOFT, if you need information on what hot keys are
active, a description of a TISOFT feature, an explanation of how a
particular controller instruction operates, or what an error message
means, press Alt H for context-sensitive help.
TISOFT Messages
B-20
Printer Timeout,
Printing Suspended
The printer has stopped working for some reason. Check the printer and
the connections to it and continue the print operation.
Program Load in
Progress or Invalidated
A load operation has been started but for some reason has not been
completed. Reset the PLC and redo the last load operation.
Program Selected
A program on disk has been selected. The name of the program has been
updated in the lower right corner of the screen.
RAM Segment
Not Allocated
This is an internal TISOFT error and should not occur except under
extenuating circumstances.
Ramp/Soak for SP
Not Selected in
Corresponding Loop
Ramp/Soak Step
Type Mismatch
The current step type does not match the step type of the step being
modified.
RBC Swapped at
Selected Base
Read-only Variable
in Output Field
Receive Error
You cannot rename a file from one drive to another drive. Use the COPY
operation.
Request Exceeds
Available Memory
Requested
Configuration Smaller
than Active Program
Requested Data
Not Found
TISOFT Messages
B-21
Reset Current
Transaction
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not
valid. An example appears below.
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not
valid. An example appears below.
C2
C4
RTN Missing in
Subroutine
Secondary Connection
Failed
The DEU has failed to connect to the named TISTAR (Model 20 or Model
70) secondary.
The named TISTAR (Model 20 or Model 70) secondary is the wrong type.
S-Memory Overflow
B-22
TISOFT Messages
This message is displayed when you try to use AUX 21 to perform a Dual
Media RBC role swap, and there is no Dual RBC configured in the
current Base.
SFPGM xxxx
Not Programmed
The requested SF Program control block has not been programmed and
is not included in the SFPGM Directory. An unprogrammed control block
cannot be enabled or disabled. To create the SF Program, type in the
desired ID number and press SHOW-F2.
SFSUB xxxx
Not Programmed
Short Circuit
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not
valid. See the following example.
C1
C2
C7
C8
C6
C4
Short Circuit or
Reverse Power Flow
C5
This error occurs when you attempt to enter a ladder rung that is not
valid. See the following example.
C3
C2
C1
See Short Circuit or Reverse Power Flow. Make sure all elements are
connected.
TISOFT Messages
B-23
Short Circuit,
See Short Circuit or Reverse Power Flow. Make sure all elements are
Unconnected Elements, connected.
or Reverse Power Flow
Slave Mismatch
Special Calculation
Variable Not Specified
This message is displayed when you are entering a LOOP table where an
SFPGM number has been specified in the Special Function field, but the
SPECIAL CALCULATION parameter has not been specified. Either
enter an option in the SPECIAL CALCULATION field, or set Special
Function to NONE.
Stack Overflow
Evaluating Math, If,
IMath Expression
The given error number has occurred on the TCP/IP network. The code
number gives a detailed description of the error.
This message indicates that the network at the specified rung address
contains too many elements in series or parallel. Re-edit the network to
reduce the number of elements in series or parallel. Perhaps break into
two simpler networks.
The RLL program contains more Immediate I/O references than the
controller can resolve. The controller allows Immediate I/O
instructionseither Immediate contact/coil or IORWto reference up to
32 8-point I/O ranges. Only one Immediate I/O module can be assigned
to points within a given I/O range.
Top of Screen
If you are using the up arrow to scroll through a status chart with
synonyms, this message indicates that the top of the chart is already on
the screen.
B-24
TISOFT Messages
Unable to Create
Print File
This message occurs when you attempt to print to a file and, for some
reason, the file cannot be created. Perhaps the disk is write protected or
full; the disk drive may have been popped open; or a disk hardware
failure may have occurred.
Unbalanced
Parentheses
Unconfigured Base
Unexpected RTN
Unexpected SBR
Before END
Unknown Instruction
Unknown Secondary
Unknown Standby
Message Returned
Value Must Be
Greater than Zero
Value Must Be
within SP Range
TISOFT Messages
B-25
Value Written
When you use AUX 19 to set the controller Scan Time, this message
indicates that the selected scan time has been written to the controller.
When you edit values (CHGVAL) in STATUS or CHART, this message
indicates that the selected value has been written to the controller.
Values Must Be
within PV Range
Values Must Be
within PV Span
Variable Address
Required
Warning
Instruction Will Not Be
Executed
Yellow Must Be
Less than or
Equal to Orange
B-26
TISOFT Messages
This message is displayed when you edit a LOOP or ALARM. The value
in the DEVIATION ALARM: YELLOW field must be less than or equal
to the value in the ORANGE field.
Appendix C
To convert programs created with TISOFT releases prior to Release 5.0, use
the file conversion software included with TISOFT Release 6.3. (Status
charts are not converted and must be re-entered for releases earlier than
4.0.) The file conversion program can be used on the following TISOFT
releases.
560T
NOTE: When converting 560/565 Rel 2.3 and earlier files, check the
following item if you have analog alarm tables in your program. If you have
the setpoint field in the table programmed to S.P. value, the conversion will
set the Remote Setpoint field in Release 6.3 to NONE and Monitor Remote
Setpoint field to NO.
C-1
Conversion
Procedure for
Releases Earlier
than 4.0
Use the following procedure to convert user programs from TISOFT releases
earlier than Release 4.0.
1.
Change to the Source Directory that contains the user program files to
be converted to Release 6.3. Use the DOS Change Directory command;
for example, cd c:\USER2.
2.
3.
Press
Return
At the prompt, ENTER NEW PROGRAM NAME, type in the new program
name and the Destination Directory if you want the program in a
different directory. To place the program in the current directory, enter
only a program name. You must specify a unique program name.
5.
Press
Return
C-2
Conversion
Procedure for
Release 4.x
Use the following procedure to convert user programs from TISOFT Release
4.x to Release 6.3.
1.
Change to the Source Directory that contains the user program files to
be converted to Release 6.3. Use the DOS Change Directory command;
for example, cd c:\USER2.
2.
3.
Press
Return
At the prompt, ENTER NEW PROGRAM NAME, type in the name of the
program to be converted.
5.
Press
Return
C-3
Appendix D
You can access TISOFT off-line only when TISTAR (Model 20 or Model 70) is
not in the Operate State or when there is no communication between the
DEU and the Operator Station. If you select on-line instead, you will be
prompted for a secondary name to connect to.
At the Start-up Screen (Figure D-1), press OFFLINE-F8.
Siemens
TISOFT 2
PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE
SIMATIC (R) 505 FAMILY
RELEASE 6.3
ORDER NUMBER PC505-6263
SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783-0032
Copyright (C) 1998
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
WARNING:
This computer program is protected by copyright law and international
treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,
and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
PRESS ALT-H FOR HELP ANYWHERE WITHIN TISOFT
EXIT-F1 HINTS-F2
ONLINE-F4
NETDATA
D-1
Accessing TISOFT
On-Line
When you select ONLINE-F4 from the TISOFT Start-up Screen, the prompt
for selecting a secondary appears, as shown in Figure D-2.
ABORT-F1
Type in the appropriate name for the secondary that you configured in
TISTAR/PCS.
2.
Press ENTER-F8.
NOTE: The system does not prompt you for a baud rate. The baud rate is
preconfigured at the factory.
If you receive any error messages while using TISOFT, refer to Appendix B.
D-2
Appendix E
E-2
E-2
E-2
E-3
E.2
E-4
E.3
E-5
E.4
Select Secondary with UNILINK Host Adapter or TIWAY Host Adapter Card . . . . . . . . . .
E-6
E.5
E-7
E-1
E.1
NOTE: Since the Network Interface Module (NIM) does not support some
task codes when the controller is in RUN mode, you cannot perform the
following functions communicating through a NIM: Force/Unforce and Find
(except Find Address).
Setting up the
TIWAY I and
UNILINK Host
Adapters
NITP protocol
Full duplex
Asynchronous
NOTE: Using TISOFT to communicate over a TIWAY network has only been
tested in MS-DOS mode. TISOFT may have problems running in Windows.
See your UNILINK Host Adapter User Manual for details on setting
dipswitches for the UNILINK Host Adapter.
Setting up the
TIWAY Host Adapter
Card
To use the TIWAY Host Adapter Card to communicate with TISOFT, follow
the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
E-2
If conditions permit you to safely interrupt your PC, reboot your PC.
NOTE: You must add Step 1 and Step 2 to your CONFIG.SYS file, in the
order given above, before you can load any other TSRs.
TISOFT On-Line
To use the TIWAY Host Adapter Card to invoke TISOFT, follow these steps.
1.
2.
Press
Return
2.
Press
Return
E-3
E.2
Siemens
TISOFT 2
PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE
SIMATIC (R) 505 FAMILY
RELEASE 6.3
ORDER NUMBER PC505-6263
SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783-0032
Copyright (C) 1998
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
WARNING:
This computer program is protected by copyright law and international
treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,
and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
SELECT SECONDARY ADDRESS: 001
ABORT-F1
ENTER-F8
E-4
E.3
Siemens
TISOFT 2
PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE
SIMATIC (R) 505 FAMILY
RELEASE 6.3
ORDER NUMBER PC505-6263
SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783-0032
Copyright (C) 1998
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
WARNING:
This computer program is protected by copyright law and international
treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,
and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
MHIU/HIU: 000 MAX SECONDARY ADDRESS: nnn
ABORT-F1
ENTER-F8
E-5
E.4
Select Secondary with UNILINK Host Adapter or TIWAY Host Adapter Card
When your programming device is connected through UNILINK Host
Adapter or the TIWAY Host Adapter Card not configured as a Network
Manager and you choose the on-line option, you will be prompted to enter
the Secondary Address of the controller.
NOTE: If your UNILINK Host Adapter or TIWAY Host Adapter Card is not
configured, you will be prompted first to select configuration parameters.
(See Figure E-2.)
2.
Siemens
TISOFT 2
PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE
SIMATIC (R) 505 FAMILY
RELEASE 6.3
ORDER NUMBER PC505-6263
SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783-0032
Copyright (C) 1998
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
WARNING:
This computer program is protected by copyright law and international
treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,
and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
SELECT SECONDARY ADDRESS: 001
ABORT-F1
CONFIG-F2
ENTER-F8
E-6
E.5
Use the left and right arrow keys to position the cursor in the entry fields.
1.
2.
3.
E-7
Appendix F
Cable Pinouts
Use the MNP (or other) error correction system. Modems will not work
reliably if error correction is not used. If your modem does not support
error correction, it should not be used.
For higher modem throughput, you may want to use the baud rate
conversion feature. This will allow you to communicate at a higher
baud rate than the actual data transmission over the telephone line.
For example, both the PC and the controller can be set to 9600 baud
while the modem is communicating over the phone line at 2400 baud.
Depending on the port hardware on your computer and your controller, use
the corresponding cable configuration as listed in Table F-1.
Table F-1 Cable Pinouts for Modem Communications
9-Pin Port to Modem
Signal
Name
PC or
Controller
9-Pin
Modem
25-Pin
Signal
Name
PC or
Controller
25-Pin
Modem
25-Pin
CD
CD
RD
RD
TD
TD
DTR
20
DTR
20
20
SGND
SGND
DSR
DSR
RTS
RTS
CTS
CTS
RI
22
RI
22
22
F-1
Using TIDIAL
Key in TIDIAL.
2.
Press
Return
NOTE: TIDIAL will not work when your computer is running Windows 95.
To use TIDIAL, restart your computer in MS-DOS mode (the Shut Down
dialog from the Windows 95 Start menu provides this option).
Setting Modem
Parameters
When you execute TIDIAL, it sends the following default setup string
to the modem:
AT X1 E1 V1 Q0
If these are not correct for your modem, then you can change them by
using the SET command at the DOS prompt. For example,
SET M_CONFIG=AT&D0&E14&E3
If you want, you can also put this command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT
file of your computer.
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that you use exactly the same type of
modem at each end of the phone line.
F-2
Appendix G
G-2
G.2
G-3
G-4
G-4
G-4
G-4
G-4
G-5
G-5
G-6
G-7
G-8
G-8
G-12
G-16
G-16
G-18
G-20
G-20
G-20
G-21
G.3
G-1
G.1
Planning tool for creating the local database (SINEC COML 1413TF
software).
Windows 3.1 for running COML 1413TF and Windows version of the
505CP1434TF Configurator, or, you can use a text editor to modify
COML 1413TF parameters and the DOS version of the configurator.
Personal Computer
H1 Configurator
COML
CP1434
1413TF
H1TC
TSR
CP1413 Firmware Drivers
TISOFT
Software Layers
DOS
Hardware Layer
CP1413 Card
H1 Protocol
G-2
G.2
NOTE: Do not install your 505CP1413 Module using the list in Figure G-2.
Use the detailed steps that begin on the next page to guide you through the
installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
G-3
NOTE: If at any point your PC locks up, power down the system and go back
to the previous steps and try other options for the settings.
Select an available I/O address for the CP1413. This number should be one
of the following: 03E0, 0390, 03E8, or 0100. The I/O address chosen should
be one that is not already being used on your computer.
WARNING
Before you install the H1 Communications Module (CP1413) into your personal
computer, make sure your power supply is turned off to guard against sudden
equipment startup or shock.
Control devices can fail in an unsafe condition, which could result in death or
serious injury to personnel, and/or equipment damage.
Safety devices and techniques must be used in all industrial control systems to
guard against sudden equipment startup.
Step 4: Select an
Interrupt
Select an available interrupt for the CP1413. This number should be one of
the following: INT 5, INT 10, INT 12, or INT 15. Try INT 12 first. The
interrupt number chosen should be one that is not already being used on
your computer.
Step 5: Select a
DRAM Address
NOTE: Ensure that the DRAM address selection (D0000 or E0000) does not
conflict with any other boards or software in your PC. Address E0000 often
conflicts with shadowed BIOS and VGA ROMs, caches, and optional ROMs.
G-4
Step 6: Configure
Extended Memory
Manager
In order to run TISOFT with H1, you need to install a memory manager.
TISOFT has been successfully configured with H1 using CEMM, QEMM,
DOS 5.x EMM386, or DOS 6.x MEMMAKER. When you edit your
CONFIG.SYS to install the memory manager of your choice, you must
include a memory exclusion command which identifies the region you have
set aside for use by the CP1413 card; the memory manager cannot have
access to the region of memory reserved for the CP1413.
Use an ASCII text editor to install the memory manager of your choice in
your CONFIG.SYS. Figure G-3 shows the appropriate instruction for
installing CEMM, QEMM, DOS 5.x EMM386, or DOS 6.x MEMMAKER, in
that order. The memory exclusion command for each line is represented by
the bolded text.
NOTE: After you modify the CONFIG.SYS file to install the memory
manager, power cycle the system to verify that it will boot up correctly.
WARNING
Using the same Ethernet H1 network address more than once on the same H1
network can cause unpredictable controller behavior.
Unpredictable controller behavior could cause death or serious injury to
personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Ensure that you do not repeat an Ethernet H1 network address on the same H1
network.
G-5
Install the CP1413 software from diskette by following the procedures in the
Software Installation section of the SINEC TFNet1413/MS-DOS, Windows
manual. Only C:\SINEC\BIN, C:\SINEC\COM, and C:\SINEC\DATA
subdirectories are required by TISOFT.
Once you have installed the card, run the INSTALL utility located on the
first TF1413 disk provided with your card. This batch program loads all
software onto your hard drive and then invokes NETINST.EXE. The
NETINST utility generates a series of prompts that must be answered so
that the CP1413 card can be correctly configured. Use the answers you
chose from the steps above to respond to the prompts. The following is a list
of selections that work for many installations:
Description
Select:
B: Full set
Installation mode
Detailed mode
New installation
CP1413
Layer 2 communications
YES
Layer 4 communications
YES
Layer 7 communications
YES
0D0000H64K
(from Step 6)
Ethernet address
08.00.06.01.00.03
(from Step 7)
AT bus interrupt
INT 12
(from Step 4)
Configuration register
03E0H
(from Step 1)
Local database
\sinec\data\startup.LDB
(Your local
hard drive letter)
Select Quit
The NETINST utility creates the directory \sinec on the selected hard
drive. This directory holds the associated configuration files and the drivers
needed to communicate over the H1 network.
You can change these settings later by running
C:\SINEC\BIN\NETINST.EXE.
G-6
NOTE: You can obtain additional information about running these utilities
by consulting the Software Installation section of the SINEC
TF-NET1413/MS-DOS, Windows Manual.
NOTE: The CP1413 requires a hardware reset whenever its hardware I/O or
INT (IRQ) number addresses are changed. If the addressing is changed, you
must turn off the power to your PC and wait a few minutes before
reapplying power. Rebooting your PC using CTRL ALT DEL is not
sufficient. The CP1413 card determines the address settings only when
electrical power is applied.
G-7
When the CP1413 card and all TF-NET software have been installed, you
can proceed to configure the network. First-time H1 users will find two
software tools helpful: the H1 Configurator, which is shipped with the
CP1434TF modules, and the SINEC Configuration Management Local
(COML), which is automatically installed when you run INSTALL to set up
the CP1413. Both of these programs run under Windows.
Before TISOFT can communicate using the SINEC Communications
Processor (CP1413TF), the associations on the CP1413 card and the
CP1434TF module must be correctly configured. The H1 Configurator
allows you to create a Technology Function (TF) Service for the CP1434TF
module; you can then use COML to create a matching association for the
CP1413 card.
NOTE: If you have not yet installed the H1 Configurator, you must do so
before continuing. Consult the Installing the Software section in the
SIMATIC 505 SINEC H1 Communication Processor User Manual for the
proper procedure to follow.
In order for one node to communicate with another, each node must be
configured to recognize the other one. When you create associations, you
give each node an identifier (that is, Transport Service Access Point, or local
TSAP) and you tell it the identifier (remote TSAP) of the other node.
Step 11: Use COML
to Set up CP1413
Local Database
(For a Single TISOFT
Station)
G-8
PC (TISOFT)
CP1413 Card
Configurator, CP1434TF
TISOFT (Optional)
UnitA (Controller)
TF/DDE (Optional)
Local Address=0800060100FF
Application Association1=UnitA
Local TSAP=UnitA
505
CP1434TF
Local Address=080006010001
Local TSAP=CP1434TF
Remote TSAP=CP1434TF
Remote Address=080006010001
Configured by user.
Hidden. Not
configured by user.
UnitB (Controller)
Application Association2=UnitB
Local TSAP=UnitB
Remote TSAP=CP1434TF
Remote Address=080006010002
505
CP1434TF
Local Address=080006010002
Local TSAP=CP1434TF
Configured by user.
Hidden. Not
configured by user.
G-9
WARNING
Using the same Ethernet H1 network address more than once on the same H1
network can cause unpredictable controller behavior.
Unpredictable controller behavior could cause death or serious injury to
personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Ensure that you do not repeat an Ethernet H1 network address on the same H1
network.
2.
3.
4.
Repeat steps 1. and 2. for the second CP1434TF module, but this time
type a different unused local Ethernet address, for example:
080006010002.
G-10
Invoke COML from Windows. This opens the SINEC COML 1413TF
window.
2.
From the drop-down File menu, select New to create a new configuration
file to hold the association that you want to make.
3.
Fill out the following fields in the SINEC COML 1413TF window.
Type a local station address that is not already in use on your H1
network: 0800060100FF. This address needs to be the same address
that you entered previously in C:\SINEC\BIN\NETINST.EXE.
Application
association name:
UnitA
UnitB
Remote Addr:
080006010001
080006010002
Local TSAP:
UnitA
UnitB
Remote TSAP:
CP1434TF
CP1434TF
5.
G-11
PC1 (TISOFT)
PC2 (TISOFT)
CP1413 Card
CP1413 Card
Configurator, CP1434TF
Configurator, CP1434TF
TISOFT (Optional)
TISOFT (Optional)
UnitA (Controller)
TF/DDE (Optional)
Local Address=0800060100FF
Application Association1=UnitA
Local TSAP=UnitA
Remote TSAP=PC1
Remote Address=080006010001
505
CP1434TF
Local Address=080006010001
Local TSAP=PC1
Local TSAP=PC2
UnitB (Controller)
Application Association2=UnitB
Local TSAP=UnitB
Remote TSAP=PC1
Remote Address=080006010002
505
CP1434TF
Local Address=080006010002
Local TSAP=PC1
Local TSAP=PC2
TF/DDE (Optional)
Local Address=0800060100DD
Application Association1=UnitA
Local TSAP=UnitA
Remote TSAP=PC2
Remote Address=080006010001
Application Association2=UnitB
Local TSAP=UnitB
Remote TSAP=PC2
Remote Address=080006010002
G-12
WARNING
Using the same Ethernet H1 network address more than once on the same H1
network can cause unpredictable controller behavior.
Unpredictable controller behavior could cause death or serious injury to
personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Ensure that you do not repeat an Ethernet H1 network address on the same H1
network.
1.
2.
3.
Repeat steps 1. and 2. for the second CP1434TF module, but this time
type a different unused local Ethernet address: 080006010002.
G-13
Invoke COML from Windows. This opens the SINEC COML 1413TF
window.
2.
From the drop-down File menu, select New to create a new configuration
file to hold the association that you want to make.
3.
Fill out the following fields in the SINEC COML 1413TF window.
Type a local station address that is not already in use on your H1
network: 0800060100FF. This address needs to be the same address
you entered previously during CP1413 software installation (Step 8) or
using the C:\SINEC\BIN\NETINST.EXE program.
Application
association name:
UnitA
UnitB
Remote Addr:
080006010001
080006010002
Local TSAP:
UnitA
UnitB
Remote TSAP:
PC1
PC1
G-14
5.
For each additional TISOFT station, install the CP1413 card and
configure it as described in this appendix (starting with Step 1) on that
particular computer. When configuring the local database for its
CP1413, set its remote TSAP names, such as PC2, MainOffice, etc.
Then create a TFService for each 505CP1434TF configuration with
the 505 configurator, and include the Ethernet address of the second
TISOFT station, a remote TSAP name, e.g., UnitA, and a local TSAP
name, e.g., PC2. For example:
Type a local station address that is not already in use on your H1
network: 0800060100FE. This address needs to be the same address
you entered previously in C:\SINEC\BIN\NETINST.EXE.
Application
association name:
UnitA
UnitB
Remote Addr:
080006010001
080006010002
Local TSAP:
UnitA
UnitB
Remote TSAP:
PC2
PC2
To automatically load the CP1413 drivers, initialize the CP1413 and allow
TISOFT to use the CP1413. Type the following lines in your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
cd c:\sinec\bin
tfnetdrv
scp_mon -c
scp_mon -l
cd \TI
H1TC 0x82
cd \
The H1 Series 505 task code driver, H1TC, is a TSR that handles Series 505
requests for the CP1434TF Configurator and TISOFT. The task code driver
uses one software address, usually 0x82 (0x80 and 0x81 are usually used by
the CP1413 TFNETDRV driver and the TF/DDE driver). If 0x82 is already
in use, pick an unused number above 0x82.
G-15
NOTE: The CP1413 driver does not run in protected mode. If you want to
run more than one application (e.g., H1 Configurator or TISOFT over H1)
close one of the applications before running the other application.
If conditions permit safely interrupting your PC, you can reboot your PC at
this time. After you reboot your PC, the AUTOEXEC.BAT changes and
CONFIG.SYS changes that you just made will be used.
AUI Drop
(6ES57271xxxx)
Personal Computer
with H1 Configurator
Software and
CP1413 Module and
TISOFT
PLC
SINEC H1 CP
110 VAC
G-16
Figure G-7 and Figure G-8 are functionally the same. Both figures show a
PC with a CP1413 module and a single Series 505 system. Figure G-7
illustrates the use of a separate single-port transceiver for each device.
Figure G-8 shows both devices attached to a single two-port transceiver.
SIBUKO Package 2
(6GK1 1000AB00)
Terminator
Trunk Thicknet
Transceiver
Transceiver
(6GK1 9010AA000AA0)
PLC
SINEC H1 CP
Personal Computer
with H1 Configurator
Software and CP1413
Module and TISOFT
SIBUKO Package 2
(6GK1 1000AB00)
Terminator
AUI Drop
(6ES57271xxxx)
AUI Drop
(6ES57271xxxx)
SIBUKO Package 6
(6GK1 1000AJ00)
Trunk Thicknet
Transceiver
(6GK1 9010AA000AC0)
PLC
AUI Drop
(6ES57271xxxx)
Personal Computer with
H1 Configurator Software
and CP1413 Module and
TISOFT
SINEC H1 CP
AUI Drop
(6ES57271xxxx)
G-17
2.
and
LDB downloaded
If the system did not lock up, and no errors were displayed on the
screen, you can continue. From the DOS command line at the
C:>SINEC\BIN prompt, enter:
scp_mon s
This returns a box describing the status of the CP1413 card. Verify that
the database is consistent and that all tasks are running.
NOTE: You can obtain additional information about starting the module and
the driver, and using the SCP monitor, by consulting the Software
Installation chapter (Sections 3.2 and 3.3) of the SINEC
TF-NET1413/MS-DOS, Windows Manual.
G-18
NOTE: The commands are listed below, but do not enter them into your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file until you have completed the configuration of your
CP1413 card and all conflicts are resolved.
cd c:\sinec\bin
tfnetdrv
scp_mon -c
scp_mon -l
cd \TI
H1TC 0x82
cd \
G-19
If the H1 task code driver has not been installed, change to the directory on
your computer where you placed TISOFT and type: H1TC 0x82.
The H1 Series 505 task code driver, H1TC, is a TSR that handles Series 505
requests for the CP1434TF Configurator and TISOFT. The task code driver
uses one software interrupt number, usually 0x82 (0x80 and 0x81 are
usually used by the TFNETDRV and the TF/DDE drivers). If 0x82 is
already in use, pick an unused number above 0x82.
After TISOFT is installed, you are ready to select the TISOFT operating
software you need. The listing below defines the options you have available.
To access the H1 network with TISOFT, type in the name of the TISOFT
operating software you selected from the list above, followed by H1 (for
example, TI505 H1) and press Return or Enter to invoke TISOFT.
G-20
After you enter the TISOFT operating software selection you wish to use,
the start-up screen is displayed as shown in Figure G-9. Your options for
choosing on- or off-line operation, color, and programs are accessed from the
start-up screen. Refer to Chapter 2 for instructions on using these options.
To select an H1 network node name, you need to press ONLINE-F4.
Siemens
TISOFT 2
PLC PROGRAMMING PACKAGE
SIMATIC (R) 505 FAMILY
RELEASE 6.3
ORDER NUMBER PC505-6263
SOFTWARE PART NUMBER 2587783-0032
Copyright (C) 1998
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
WARNING:
This computer program is protected by copyright law and international
treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,
and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
PRESS ALT-H FOR HELP ANYWHERE WITHIN TISOFT
EXIT-F1 HINTS-F2
ONLINE-F4
NETDATA
G-21
The H1 Network Names screen appears as in Figure G-10. You can then
select a node name. These are the node names you configured using the
COML 1413TF software prior to rebooting.
Using the arrow keys, select an H1 network node name and press
ENTER-F8 or Return or Enter . TISOFT will go online.
Siemens
H1 NETWORK NAMES
UnitA
UnitB
NEW 1
ABORT-F1
PAGE-F5
ENTER-F8
NOTE: The CP1413 driver does not run in protected mode. If you want to
run more than one application (for example, H1 Configurator or TISOFT
over H1) close one of the applications before running the other application.
G-22
G.3
Troubleshooting
G-23
G-24
Definition
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Appendix H
Using Password
H.1
H.2
H.3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-2
H-2
H-2
H-3
H-3
H-4
H-4
H-5
H-6
H-6
H-9
Using Password
H-1
H.1
Overview
The password feature provides protection for areas of memory that are part
of the program. There are two passwords, one for the selected program on
disk and one for the controller. They do not have to be the same.
A password value consists of one to eight alphanumeric digits (for example,
09; uppercase AZ). Online, you can be prompted for the password for the
controller program and/or for the selected program on disk. Offline, you are
prompted for a password only for the selected program on disk.
Disabled and
Enabled Passwords
for the Selected
Program on Disk
Disabled and
Enabled Passwords
in the Controller
H-2
Using Password
Controller
Password Access
Levels
Three levels of access are available when a password has been entered and
enabled in the controller.
Using Password
H-3
H.2
Off-Line Password
Selection and
Access Level
When you are offline, you can press P from the ladder display to invoke
the screen options that are shown in Figure H-1. Then, you can either set or
change the password, or you can set the controller access.
PASSWORD: NONE
EXIT-F1
545 NETDATA
NOACC-F6 RDONLY-F7 FULL-F8
H-4
Using Password
On-Line Password
Selection and
Access Level
When you are online, you can use the AUX-F6 key and type in 85 at the
prompt to set or change the password or to set the level of access. AUX 85
invokes the password selection screen shown in Figure H-2.
PASSWORD: DISABLED
Using Password
H-5
H.3
On-Line Password
Operational Modes
H-6
Using Password
All on-line password operational modes are summarized in Table H-1. The
following numbered paragraphs detail the corresponding mode-number
information found in Table H-1.
Mode 1.
Mode 2.
Mode 3.
Mode 4.
If the controller has a password and you enter a password for the
controller at the on-line prompt, you will be able to use the AUX
60 (Save All) and the AUX 90 (Load All) functions. AUX 60 writes
the controller password to the selected program on disk. AUX 90
retains the controller password. You will also have full access to
the controller and the selected program on disk.
Mode 5.
Mode 6.
Mode 7.
Mode 8.
Mode 9.
Using Password
H-7
Controller
Password
Disk
Password
User
Password
No
No
Not asked
for.
Yes. No password.
Yes. No password.
No
Yes
User gives
password
for selected
program
on disk.
Yes. Selected
program on disk
password is
retained.
No
Yes
User does
not give
password
for
program
on disk.
No. Selected
program on disk is
password protected.
Only if controller
supports password.
Yes
No
User gives
controller
password.
Yes. Controller
password is written
to disk.
Yes. Controller
password is
retained.
Yes
No
User does
not give a
password.
No. Controller is
password protected.
No. Controller is
password protected.
Yes
Yes
User gives
disk and
controller
password.
Yes. Selected
program on disk
password is
retained.
Yes. Controller
password is
retained.
Yes
Yes
User gives
disk
password.
No. Controller is
password protected.
No. Controller is
password protected.
Yes
Yes
User gives
controller
password.
No. Selected
program on disk is
password protected.
Yes. Selected
program on disk
password is written
to controller and
enabled.
Yes
Yes
User gives
no
password.
No.
No.
H-8
Using Password
Comments
On-Line Disk
Operations with
Password
Table H-2 shows on-line disk operations that are allowed when the selected
program on disk is password-protected. Table H-3 shows on-line disk
operations that are not allowed when the selected program on disk is
password-protected.
Table H-2 On-Line Disk Operations Allowed by Password Protection
Disk Operations That Are Allowed with a
Password-Protected Selected Program on Disk
Change selected program on disk
Read current application ID from selected program on disk
Read print selection table
Read print setup table
Read title
Display synonyms in ladders, status, chart, I/O show and documentation
Display comments in ladders, status, S-memory and documentation
Synonym toggle
Comment toggle
Load all AUX 90 (if controller supports password)
AUX 17, compare controller to selected program on disk
Load AUX 17 screen
Using Password
H-9
Appendix I
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I-2
I.2
I-3
I-3
I-3
I-4
I-5
I-5
I-5
I-6
I-6
I-6
I-7
I-7
I-8
I-9
I-9
I-10
I.3
I.4
I-1
I.1
Overview
To establish TCP/IP communications, you must perform the following tasks:
Specify a path to the Host Table that will hold the IP address and corresponding
host name for the controllers you want to use on your network.
These tasks are described in more detail on the pages that follow.
I-2
I.2
To use TISOFT over an Ethernet network with the TCP/IP protocol, you
need to purchase and install the PPX:505CP2572 module in a Series 505
base. Refer to the SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP/IP Communication Processor
(505CP2572) User Manual, PPX:5058132x, for instructions.
NOTE: The CP2572 is a Special Function (SF) module. If you have more
than one SF module installed in a base, you should set the PLC Task Codes
per Scan (AUX 16) to 8 to ensure maximum performance for data transfer
between the CP2572 and the controller.
Assign an IP
Address to the
Module
There are two ways to configure the IP address for your PPX:505CP2572
module. Each procedure has different advantages, as outlined in Table I-1.
Table I-1 Alternatives for Loading IP Address
Procedure
Autostart
PLC Start
Advantages
Disadvantages
Must reprogram EEPROM whenever CP2572 module
is replaced.
A CP2572 module programmed in one application and
installed in another would respond to the wrong IP
address, unless reprogrammed.
Cannot swap CP2572 modules without reprogramming
EEPROMs through serial port by a PC.
IP Address is not loaded unless CPU enters RUN
mode; if power is lost when CPU is not in RUN mode,
you must manually bring CPU back to RUN mode (via
programming device in CPUs RS-232 port) to restore
Ethernet communications.
If multiple controllers perform the same function, you
must modify ladder logic program for each one so that
it contains a unique IP address.
I-3
Network 1:
Use MOVW box to move table values stored in K-memory to V-memory for logic execution.
STW201.10
C1
MOVW
A:K500
B:V500
N=15
Network 2:
Logic is triggered by first-scan flag bit, rather than coil C1.
(If C1 is used elsewhere in program, it might come on unpredictably; flag bit comes on exclusively for first scan.)
STW201.10
LDC1
C1
A:WY5
N=500
Network 3:
This rung is the same as the sample program in the TCP/IP manual, Chapter 2.
WX1.3
WX2.3
WY4.3
WY4.2
WY4.3
I-4
Entering an
IP Address in TISOFT
IP Address:
Hex value:
C623
V506
220A
V507
Two words of
memory required
to store IP Address
If you want to load the IP address into the CP2572 module EEPROM, then
you must use the TCP Module Configuration tool (IPSET) that comes with
the module. Refer to the included documentation for a description of how to
use the IP address configuration tool.
Connect the
Module to the
Ethernet
I-5
I.3
Connect Your PC to
the Ethernet
Your system administrator must determine what type of cable is best suited
for your installation, because it affects your choice of Ethernet card for your
PC. The FTP Software packages (see below) support industry-standard
Ethernet cards such as 3COM or NE2000 cards.
Install PC/TCP
Kernel or OnNet
Kernel
Phone: 5086853300
Email: info@ftp.com
Website: http://www.ftp.com
Only the use of the PC/TCP Kernel software will be described here. Before
you commence installation, talk to your system administrator and obtain all
prerequisite information about your network (IP addresses, etc.). The
PC/TCP Kernel software comes with an installation checklist that identifies
all of the information you needbe sure to fill it out before you start the
installation. Unless you have specialized configuration needs, you can follow
the Express Install procedure. For installation instructions, consult the
documentation that comes with your FTP software.
NOTE: The following pieces of information are always required, and must be
entered accurately: the Internet (IP) address of your PC, the subnet mask,
and the IP address of your routers, if you use any on the network.
I-6
Verify the
Installation
(Optional)
Specify a Path to
the Host Table File
After you install PC/TCP Kernel on your PC, you need to specify the path to
the file where you will store your host table. The host table is a file that you
create to store IP addresses and logical names for the controllers that you
want to use on your network. Your FTP software package comes with a
configuration utility that prompts you for the host table path. To run the
PC/TCP configuration utility, follow the procedure below.
1.
At the DOS prompt, switch to the directory where your PC/TCP files
are stored. For instance, if you created a directory called PCTCP to hold
the software, you would type the following command:
cd pctcp
2.
From the directory that holds your PC/TCP files, type the following
command:
config
This invokes the PC/TCP Config utility.
3.
At the prompt, Choose what you would like to configure from the list,
choose PC/TCP Kernel. The prompt Host table: appears.
4.
Type the full path to the host table file. (You can run the Config utility
before you make the host table; all you are doing is identifying the
location where you plan to store the file.) For instance, if you are going
to store your host table in a file called HOST.TXT, located in
subdirectory PCTCP on your C: drive, the path would be:
c:\pctcp\host.txt.
This is the only data you need to add to the configuration file; after you
answer the Host table: prompt, you can save your configuration and exit
the Config utility.
I-7
##################################
#
# a sample host table...
#
##################################
# ProNet 3 host names
128.127.126.1
blender1
128.127.126.125
mixer2
128.127.126.128
masher
# end of file
I-8
I.4
Starting TISOFT
using TCP/IP
Communications
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the controller connection that you want to use, and press
ENTER-F8.
Return
or
I-9
I-10
Meaning
HostNum index is larger than the number of hosts minus one that
is currently recognized by the TSR program.
The FTP kernel was unable to match the indexed host name with
an IP address.
The FTP kernel was unable to connect with the requested host.
The FTP kernel was unable to set the requested timeout value.
The FTP kernel experienced an error while trying to access the host
table.
10
11
12
The error numbers (x) most likely to appear are 4, 6, and 7, which indicate a
problem in connecting to or communicating with the CP2572 module. If one
of these errors occurs, shut down TISOFT and make sure that you can
reliably ping the CP2572 module. You may have an incorrect IP address in
the host table, or the FTP kernel may be configured with an incorrect router
address.
When the error number (x) is 10, the error code value (y) contains either the
CAMP error code, which is described in the appendix of the SIMATIC 505
Ethernet TCP/IP Communication Processor (505CP2572) User Manual, or
else one of the following special values:
65535
65534
65533
Error number 12 occurs if the host table contains more than 64 entries.
When the error number (x) is 1, 11, or 12, the error code value (y) is zero.
I-11
Appendix J
J-2
J.2
J-3
J-3
J-3
J-3
J-4
J-4
J-4
J-4
J-4
J-5
J-5
J-5
J-5
J-6
J-6
J-6
J-6
J-7
J.3
J.4
J.5
J-1
J.1
Configure the Module Local Configuration for the FMS CP module in each station
using COM5434 Configurator software connected to the RS-232 port on the FMS CP
module with a TISOFT programming cable.
Connect your PC (from the CP 5412 card port) and each FMS CP module to the
PROFIBUS network.
Build an FMS Node list in a text editor (such as WordPad, Notepad, DOS Edit).
Select ONLINE, select Node List from menu, and select desired station.
J-2
J.2
Installing the
CP 5412 (A2) Card
in your PC
Installing the
S7-5412/MS-DOS,
Windows Software
After installing the CP 5412 (A2) card in the PC, you must install the
S7-5412/MS-DOS, Windows software to configure the card for PROFIBUS
network operation.
NOTE: The CP 5412 (A2) card must be assigned an interrupt that is not
used by any other device on your computer. You can use the diagnostic
function in the S7-5412/MS-DOS, Windows software to determine the
available interrupts. The software cannot, however, detect the interrupt
used by a SCSI driver.
Configuring the
CP 5412 Card for
Network Operation
NOTE: Make sure to select the bus parameters, the baud rate, and the
highest station address (HSA) that match those of the network. Also be sure
to select a unique network address for the CP 5412 device.
J-3
J.3
Installing the
FMS CP Module in
a SIMATIC 505 Base
Installing the
COM5434
Configurator
Software
Configuring the
FMS CP Module
NOTE: You must define the module local configuration for each FMS CP
module using the RS-232 port with the standard TISOFT programming
cable before you can communicate with it using the PROFIBUS-FMS port.
NOTE: Make sure to select the bus parameters, the baud rate, and the
highest station address (HSA) that match those of all the other modules on
the network. Also be sure to select a unique station address for each FMS
CP module on the network.
Connecting to the
PROFIBUS Network
J-4
Once each FMS CP module has been configured to operate on the network,
connect each FMS CP station and the CP 5412 card in your PC to the
PROFIBUS network, using the PROFIBUS cables and connectors described
in the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS-FMS Communication Processor
(505CP5434FMS) User Manual.
J.4
What is a
Node List?
Each node list file that you create consists of the station address of each
device on a PROFIBUS network and a name that you want to associate with
each station address, as shown in the example in Figure J-1.
Network1.fnl - Notepad
File Edit Search
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Help
13
Final_Assembly_Station
14
Inspection_Station
15
DeliveryPreparation_Station
#Comments on new line must begin with pound (#) sign.
Change the
Extension to .FNL
You can create a node list file for each network using an ASCII text editor,
such as Notepad, WordPad, or DOS EDIT. Follow these guidelines:
Use a space or tab between each station address and device name.
Do not use spaces within a name. For example, you may use Station1,
Station1, or Station_1, but not Station 1.
After creating your node list, save the file in the directory of your choice (for
example, the same directory as your TISOFT program), and change the
extension (usually .TXT) to .FNL (FMS node list).
J-5
J.5
Initializing the
TCPFB Task Code
Driver
To initialize the task code driver that enables communications over the
PROFIBUS-FMS network, follow these steps:
1.
Use any text editor to select and edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT file in the
drive where TISOFT is installed.
If you use a Windows text editor such as Notepad, use the command
File Open... and browse to the appropriate drive. Select All Files
in the Files of type field to enable the Open browser to display the
AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
2.
Add the TCPFB task code driver path with an unused interrupt (from
82 to FF) to the file. For example, type the following path:
C:\TI\TCPFB 0x82
If the interrupt is already in use, pick any unused value above 0x82.
3.
Invoking TISOFT
with FMS
Communications
2.
Creating a TISOFT
Shortcut Icon to
Invoke FMS
Communications
You can add another TISOFT icon on your Windows 95 desktop that starts
TISOFT in a DOS window using FMS communications. Refer to Section 1.4
for the basic procedure of creating a shortcut icon. Give the new icon a
unique name (for example, TISOFT-FMS). Then follow these steps:
1.
Use a single click to select the newly created TISOFT icon, then click
the right mouse button to access the pop-up menu, and select
Properties. A TISOFT Properties dialog appears.
2.
3.
In the Cmd line field, enter FMS in the path. For example, the
command line might read C:\TI\TI505.BAT fms.
4.
Click on OK.
Now every time you double-click on the new TISOFT shortcut icon, TISOFT
starts automatically in FMS communications mode.
J-6
Selecting an FMS
Station from the
Node List
After starting TISOFT online, the FMS node list appears, as shown in
Figure J-2.
Siemens
FMS NETWORK NAMES
Primer_Station1
Primer_Station2
Undercoat_Station
Spraypaint_1&2
Spraypaint_3&4
Clearcoat_Station
Finishing
Final_Assembly_Station
Inspection_Station
DeliveryPreparation_Station
ABORT-F1
NODLST-F3
NEWORK1
ENTER-F8
PAGE-F5
If you have created more than one node list file, press NODLST-F3 to
access the list of files, and select the one you want to access. Press
SELECT-F8 or Return .
2.
From the list of station names displayed, select the station you want to
communicate with and press ENTER-F8 or Return .
J-7
Troubleshooting
If the FMS task code driver encounters an error during TISOFT operation,
you may see a prompt in the lower left hand corner that follows this syntax:
FMS NETWORK ERROR x, CODE: y
where x corresponds to an error number in Table J-1, and y corresponds to
an internal error code value that provides more detailed diagnostics for
factory assistance.
Table J-1 FMS Network Error Codes
Error
Description
Receive buffer supplied by user is too small for task code response.
10
11
12
14
16
18
20
Duplicate await_close_req.*
22
24
26
28
29
30
32
4660
*These errors should not occur, and may be an indication of a factory repair problem.
J-8
Appendix K
K-2
K.2
K-4
K-1
K.1
Description
*.ALM
Alarm data
*.APP
575 applications
*.BKP
*.BTP
*.BVP
*.BWP
*.CCP
*.CIP
*.CJP
*.CMT
Comment data
*.CSP
*.KMM
K-memory data
*.LOP
Loop data
*.PFB
PROFIBUS-DP data
*.PGM
SF program data
*.PRT
*.SCP
*.SIP
*.SJP
*.SKP
*.STP
*.SUB
SF subroutine data
*.SVP
*.SWP
*.SYN
Synonym data
*.TTL
Title data
*.UMM
U-memory data
*.VMM
V-memory data
*.VP5
Table K-2 lists the same TISOFT files as Table K-1, grouped by function.
K-2
Description
Synonyms:
*.BKP
*.BTP
*.BVP
*.BWP
*.SCP
*.SIP
*.SJP
*.SKP
*.STP
*.SVP
*.SWP
*.SYN
Comments:
*.CCP
*.CIP
*.CJP
*.CMT
*.CSP
S-memory:
*.ALM
*.LOP
*.PGM
*.SUB
Alarm data
Loop data
SF program data
SF subroutine data
General:
*.APP
*.KMM
*.PFB
*.PRT
*.TTL
*.UMM
*.VMM
*.VP5
575 applications
K-memory data
PROFIBUS-DP data
Printer setup and selection data
Title data
U-memory data
V-memory data
General disk information, ladders, memory and I/O configuration,
Aux 17, I/O value data, scan time
Description
Status charts
PROFIBUS-FMS network node list
Keyboard macros
External subroutine S-Record data
Status select tables
Import/export comment text data
Temporary data
Import/export synonym text data
PROFIBUS-DP binary export data
K-3
K.2
Select
TISOFT icon
TISOFT
Open
TISOFT
Send To
Cut
Copy
Create Shortcut
Delete
Rename
Select Properties
Properties
NOTE: You may find that running TISOFT in MS-DOS mode provides better
performance in PC-to-controller communications. Click on the Advanced...
button, and check MS-DOS mode. The computer exits Windows and starts
TISOFT in MS-DOS mode. You can also create an additional shortcut icon
with the MS-DOS mode property set, so that you can easily choose which
mode to run TISOFT in.
K-4
Font
Available types:
Font size:
Memory
Conventional memory
Total:
Auto
Initial environment:
Auto
Protected
not checked
Expanded (EMS) memory
Total:
Auto
Extended (XMS) memory
Total:
None or Auto
Uses HMA
checked
MS-DOS protected-mode (DPMI) memory
Total:
Auto
Screen
Usage
Full screen
Window
Initial size:
Window
Display toolbar
Restore settings on startup
Performance
Fast ROM emulation
Dynamic memory allocation
not set
set
Default
checked
checked
checked
checked
Misc.
Foreground
Allow screen saver
Background
Always suspend
Idle sensitivity
Mouse
QuickEdit
Exclusive mode
Termination
Warn if still active
Other
Fast pasting
Windows shortcut keys
checked
not checked
low to medium
not checked
not checked
checked
not checked
all checked
K-5
505IO
505 I/O switches status screen from displaying PROFIBUS-DP to Series 505 I/O.
AACK
AADB
ABORT
ABS(X)
ABSV
ACF
ACFH
ACFL
ADD
ADDR
AERR
AHA
AHHA
ALA
ALARM
Provides access to analog alarm function, or selects alarm data to act on.
ALLA
AND
AODA
APETn
Provides for each analog alarm a peak elapsed time that is the time from the
alarm being scheduled until the process completes execution (n = 1128).
APV
APVA
APVH
Alarm Process Variable High, high limit for alarm process variable; must be real.
APVL
Alarm Process Variable Low, low limit for alarm process variable; must be real.
ARCA
ARCCOS(X)
ARCSIN(X)
ARCTAN(X)
ARSA
Glossary
ASCII CBD
ASCII
ASP
ASPH
High Limit for Analog Alarm Setpoint, may be either integer or real.
ASPL
Low limit for Analog Alarm Setpoint, may be either integer or real.
ASYNC
ATS
AUX
Auxiliary Functions refers to on-line functions that interface with the controller.
AUTORN
Automatic Rung Insert automatically inserts rungs after entering until you abort
the rung edit or press AUTORN again.
AVF
AVFA
AYDA
Backspace
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor position (a hard key).
BCD
Binary Coded Decimal is a number with four binary bits representing a decimal
digit. See HEX.
BCDBIN
BEFORE
Causes the printer to skip to the beginning of a page before printing a rung and
the associated comment.
BIN
BINBCD
BITC
BITP
Bit Pick tests a selected bit of a specified memory word to determine its status.
The bit is not affected by the BITP instruction, and retains its value in memory.
BITS
BLDCHT
BLDTBL
Build Table accesses build table function in global search and replace.
BLOCK
BOX
Represents a control relay. Control relays may be either contacts, coils, or box
parameters according to their functions in the program. C0 may be used in boxes
to clear a parameter field.
CALL
CBD
Glossary
CDB COMPSE
CDB
CDT
Correlated Data Table locates an entry in an input table that is greater than or
equal to a specified input value. The corresponding entry in the output table is
then written to the output address.
CEIL(X)
CHART
CHGVAL
In STATUS or CHART, accesses the edit function for displaying, forcing, and
entering of elements.
CLEAR
CLRBS
Clear Base, used in configure I/O, erases all the data on the screen.
CLRCHT
CLRLOC
Clear Location erases selected location in the status chart or replace table.
CMP
CMPACT
Compact moves all discrete image register types to word image register types for
every module of the selected slave, and unifies all modules into the first module.
Ctrl L
COIL
COL
In ladder editor insert, this key inserts a blank column at the block cursor,
shifting remaining columns to the right and extending horizontal connections.
The right arrow does the same function.
COLOR
Accesses the menu to select background and foreground colors for TISOFT
displays.
COM
Comment provides information for a rung in the program. Only one comment is
allowed per rung, and it is tied to the first output element for the rung. A
comment may be up to 16 lines long, with 60 characters on each line. Comment
can also be used for loop, alarm, SFPGM, and SFSUB. Comment either accesses
comment functions for documenting programs, or selects comment data.
COMMNT
See COM.
COMPAR
Compare compares the I/O configuration in the controller with the actual
configuration of the I/O modules in a selected base. Any differences are shown in
bright intensity in the chart, and two symbols (**) appear to the left of the slot
affected.
COMPIL
COMPSE
Return
Glossary
COMTGL DELCHN
COMTGL
Comment Toggle toggles the display of comments on or off for displayed ladder
rungs. In both on-line and off-line modes, the information is obtained from the
currently selected program when comment display is on. In the Replace table, it
toggles the copying of comments.
CONFIG
CONFIO
Configure Input/Output configures or displays the inputs and outputs for the
controller, base, RAM, or selected program on disk.
CONFME
Configure Memory allocates the memory areas of the selected program on disk or
the controller. On-line, it displays the memory ranges of the controller or disk and
writes memory ranges to the disk or controller. Off-line, CONFME displays and
selects memory ranges in the programming device RAM and allows selection of a
controller type.
CONT
Continue scrolls display of I/O in Aux Function 25. In the Update function,
Continue writes the PROFIBUS-DP screen data to the controller and to the
selected program on disk, and advances the Update prompt to the next
unconfigured slave.
CONTOE
CONTACT
Control Relays
Are part of the controller internal memory, and do not exist as physical input or
output devices. Control relay contacts or coils are represented by the letter C.
COPY
COS(X)
CTR
CTRS
CURDSK
CURPRT
Reads and shows the application ID assigned to the currently connected CPU
port.
CURRNT
Selects the current Status Chart to be displayed with ladders in status select.
DCAT
DCC
DCMP
DCP
Drum Counter Preset is the starting value for the drum step count. This is a two
part element: the first part is the drum number; the second is the step number. It
is displayed in the format DCPxxxx.yy (for example, DCP1.1).
Del
Del (Delete Character) deletes the character at the cursor and moves characters
on the right to fill the vacated space; it is a hard key.
DELCHN
Delete Channel deletes all channels configured in RAM from the selected channel
through the last channel.
Glossary
DELETE ENABLE
DELETE
DELLN
Delete Line deletes the line on which the cursor is placed. The location of the
cursor on the line is not important. The rest of the lines of text move up to fill the
vacated line.
DELNET
Delete Network deletes the network on the screen from a ladder program.
DELST
DESCR
DIR
Accesses the sub-window and function keys for performing directory operations.
DIRECT
DISABL
DISPSW
DIS/CP
DIV
DOCUM
Document allows you to display and edit titles, comments, and synonyms.
DOUBLE
DRM
DRUM
DSC
DSET
Date Set sets the date portion of the real-time clock to values contained in
designated V-memory locations.
DSP
Toggles enable/disable of the current base when configuring I/O; it is a hard key.
EDIT
Allows you to change ladder logic in ladder display. In comment or title, does not
insert a new line after pressing Return . Allows the changing of S-memory data.
Also, allows editing of a PROFIBUS-DP I/O configuration.
EDRUM
ELEMNT
Element accesses variable types for Find operation in SFPGMs and SFSUBs.
ELSE
ENABLE
Glossary
END G
END
Is a coil that unconditionally terminates the program memory scan, and is also an
end of R/S marker. It is a hard key on a PC that moves the cursor to the top of the
output column of the current rung in RLL, or moves the cursor to the end of the
line or page.
ENDC
End Conditional is a coil that terminates the current memory scan and clears
any active MCR and JMP instructions when the input to the ENDC is on.
ENDIF
EN/DIS
ENPSW
Enables Password Protection in the controller and the selected program on disk.
ENTER
ERASE
ESC
EXECUTE
EXIT
EXPORT
EXP(X)
FIND
Locates and displays various elements, boxes, statements, and rungs. In I/O
configuration, it finds the location of a particular I/O point.
FIXED
Refers to a scan time that is a set length and does not vary.
FLDTGL
Moves cursor between sub-window menu and prompt fields in PGMS function.
FLOOR(X)
FMTGL
Format Toggle toggles between saving and not saving the format in the V-K
memory editor. The mode is shown on the lower right of the screen.
FORCE
Sets an element to a specified value. The element remains the same value until
UNFORC is selected. Only X, Y, C, WX, or WY can be forced.
FORMAT
FRAC(X)
FRS
Forced Roll Swap does a forced roll swap between Hot Backup Units.
FTSR-IN
FTSR-OUT
FULL
Glossary
Global CR Ins
Global CR
Is a type of CR that can be accessed by any part of the program. The range of
global CRs is determined by the I/O configuration and the controller model.
GOTO
GTS
HALT
Hard Key
HEX
HINTS
HIU
HIUEHA
Host Interface Unit Emulate Host Adapter configures Unilink Host Adapter on
TIWAY network.
Home
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current rung in RLL, or moves the
cursor to the beginning of the line or page; it is a hard key.
HORZ
Horizontal draws a horizontal line beginning at the position of the cursor. A line
cannot be drawn over a box. It can, however, overwrite a contact.
HORZD
Horizontal Delete deletes the line, contact, coil, or box under the cursor in the
ladder editor.
IF
IIF
Integer IF; same as IF for integer math in SF statements; allows you to code
IF-THEN-ELSE blocks using an integer expression for the conditional. Integer
expressions execute faster than equivalent floating-point expressions.
IMC
Indexed Matrix Compare compares the bit pattern of a user-specified step to the
current state of up to 15 I/O points. Specify the step number (index the
instruction) by loading a step number (116) into the location specified for PTR.
The IMC compares a 15-bit mask pattern against the image register status of up
to 15 discrete points.
IO
IORW
IMATH
IMPORT
INLTGL
In-line Toggle in SFPGM and SFSUB boxes sets the box instruction to execute
in-line if the SF program or subroutine has been compiled. When power flow is on
for an in-line SFPGM or SFSUB box instruction, the box executes immediately as
part of the ladder scan. The result of the boxs execution is available to the next
element of the current rung.
Ins
In ladder edit, accesses a menu that allows rows, columns, elements, or rungs to
be inserted; for text data, accesses character insert mode. It is a hard key.
Glossary
INSERT LLLA
INSERT
In ladder edit, accesses a menu that allows rows, columns, elements, or empty
rungs to be inserted. In Print Setup, it inserts a print control sequence number.
INSLN
Insert Line inserts a line above the line or R/S step on which the cursor is placed.
INSMOD
Insert Mode automatically inserts elements until you exit the edit operation or
press the INSMOD key again.
INSST
INSTR
INT
Integer is an unsigned decimal number from 0 to 65535. Any entry above the
65535 range checks to 65535. Also, a relational contact parameter indicating a
signed integer compare.
Draws a vertical line down from the bottom left edge of the cursor; a hard key.
JMP
Jump is a coil that freezes all outputs in its field of control. Each JMP instruction
must be numbered (18). Numbers may be used more than once.
JMPE
LABEL
LACK
LADB
LADDER
LBL
LCF
LCFH
Loop C-Flags High, most significant word of loop C-flags, must be an integer.
LCFL
Loop C-Flags Low, least significant word of loop C-flag, must be an integer.
LDA
Load Address copies the address of a memory location into a memory location.
LDC
Load Data Constant is a box that loads the indicated data constant into a
designated memory location.
LEAD/LAG
LERR
LHA
LHHA
LIMIT
LKC
LKD
LLA
LLLA
Glossary
LMN MCR
LMN
LMNA
LMX
LN(X)
Local CR
LOCK
Designates that loop card operating mode will follow discrete CPU mode; a box
that allows you to coordinate access to resources
LODA
LOG(X)
LOOP
Accesses loop directory for using loop functions or selects loop data to act on.
LPETn
provides for each loop a peak elapsed time that is the time from the loop being
scheduled until the process completes execution (n = 164).
LPV
LPVA
LPVH
LPVL
LRCA
LRFA
LRSA
LRSF
LRSN
LSP
LSPH
LSPL
LTD
LTI
LTS
LVF
LVFA
LYDA
MATH
MCAT
Motor Control Alarm Timer, box instruction that operates with motor driven
valves that drive in each direction.
MCR
Master Control Relay is a coil that turns off all coils within the zone of control
between the MCR instruction and the MCRE instruction. Each MCR instruction
must be numbered (18). Numbers may be used more than once.
Glossary
MCRE N
MCRE
Master Control Relay End is a coil that terminates a master control relay
function.
MDRMD
MDRMW
MDRUM
MERGE
Reads the COM PROFIBUS parameter configuration binary file and merges this
information into the selected TISOFT program on disk.
MHIU
Master Host Interface Unit configures Unilink Host Adapter on TIWAY network.
MHIUEHA
Master Host Interface Unit Emulate Host Adapter configures Unilink Host
Adapter on TIWAY network.
MIRFT
Move Image Register from Table allows moving of data from a table of consecutive
word locations to the Image Register.
MIRTT
Move Image Register to Table allows moving of data from the Image Register to a
table of consecutive word locations.
MIRW
Move Image Register to Word clears memory location A and shifts the number of
bits specified from the discrete image register (X,Y, or C) to the word in memory
location A in a single memory scan.
MKDIR
MOD
MOVE
In Block, moves the selected block to another location, then deletes the source
block. The Move Element box instruction copies data elements from a source
address to a destination address.
MOVW
MULT
MWFT
Move Word From Table moves words from a table location in V-memory to
another location in V-memory, as specified by a table address pointer. One word is
moved in each memory scan. MWFT & MWTT instructions must have different
numbers.
Move Word with Indirect addressing allows moving 1 to 256 words from one area
of V-memory to another.
MWI
MWIR
Move Word to Image Register allows a specific number of bits to be shifted from a
word memory location to specified discrete image register locations in a single
memory scan.
MWTT
Move Word to Table moves words from a word source in V-memory to a table
destination address specified by a pointer in V-memory. One word is moved
during each memory scan.
Performs the horizontal delete line function; also a No response. It is a hard key.
10
Glossary
NEXT PC
NEXT
Finds and displays the next programmed ladder rung address in status select. In
I/O configuration it finds the next location of an I/O point.
NO
NOACC
NOCMPL
NODLST
Node List in FMS communications allows you to select a file that contains a list of
network station names in order to select a station for on-line communications.
NONE
NOP
NOT
Is the logical NOT operator in SF MATH and IF statements; NOT is also an RLL
box to invert power flow.
NEXTDM
Locates the next Dual Media RBC after the channel and base number entered at
the prompt.
NXTIN
ODD
Causes the printer to skip to the beginning of the next odd numbered page before
printing a rung and its associated comment.
OFFLINE
ONLINE
OPER
OPR/ST
OR
OS
One Shot is a box that looks like a contact; it provides an output for one controller
scan.
OUTPUT
OUTTGL
PACK
PACKAA
Pack Analog Alarm copies alarm data to/from a specified table. Up to eight alarm
data type parameters may be copied.
PACKLOOP
Copies loop data to/from a specified table. Up to eight loop data type parameters
may be copied.
PACKRS
PAGE
In print mode, it lets the printer continue to the end of the page and then stop. In
H1, TCP, or FMS communications, Page allows you to select a list of names.
PC
Personal Computer
Glossary
11
PETWD RDTBL
PETWD
PgDn
PG/RN
Program/Run allows the selection of discrete CPU mode, loop card mode, and
interaction between the two.
PGM
PGMFRZ
Program Freeze places the controller in Program mode with all outputs remaining
in the state they were prior to initiating Freeze mode.
PGMOFF
Program Off places the controller in Program mode with discrete outputs set to
zero and word outputs frozen.
PGMS
Accesses the function keys that enable performing program selection operations.
PGTS
PGTSZ
PgUp
PLC
PORTCF
Port Configuration. For the 575 controller, accesses menu to configure port
parameters.
PPETn
Provides for each SF program a peak elapsed time that is the time from the SF
program being scheduled until the process completes execution (n= 11023).
(Function Key) prints selected groups of program data; (Hard Key) prints the
screen display; also an SF instruction that sends text and data through the ASCII
message ports to a printer.
PRODP
PRTCTL
Print Control accesses function menu for entering control characters for printers.
PUT
QUIT
Terminates the print operation and keeps the printer paper on a page boundary.
R/S
RAMP
RDCHT
RDDATE
Read Date reads the date from the programming device and displays it on the
print setup screen.
RDONLY
RDTBL
Read Table loads a saved Select Table to replace the current table.
12
Glossary
READ RUNDIA
READ
In Status CHGVAL, reads the value of the selected element. In V/K memory, it
refreshes the screen display. In Replace edit, it reads elements for the last
selected range. In AUX 14, it reads Watchdog timeout; in AUX 16, it reads Task
Code values; in AUX 18 it reads time of day; in AUX 19, it reads controller scan
time. In AUX 15 and AUX 23 it reads part numbers.
READBS
Read Base obtains the I/O module Definition Chart for the selected base from the
base. Available on-line only.
READDK
Read Disk displays the memory configuration or the I/O Module Definition from
the disk. In Print, it reads the setup or selection parameters from the disk.
READPC
Read PLC displays the memory configuration or the I/O Module Definition from
the controller. Available on-line only.
READRM
Read RAM displays the memory configuration or the I/O Module Definition from
the programming device RAM. Available off-line only.
REAL
A number format that uses decimal points and a floating point number. This
format takes two words (32 bits).
RECOVR
RENAME
REPLAC
REQAPP
RESTOR
Restores modules for the selected slave according to the COM PROFIBUS
configuration, including the image register types
RESTRT
RESUME
RETURN
RMDIR
Deletes the selected directory (if the directory is empty) in PGMS function.
ROUND(X)
ROW
In ladder editor insert, this key inserts a blank row at the block cursor, shifting
remaining rows down and extending vertical connections. The down arrow does
the same function.
RST
Reset Coil (used with Set Coil) to reset a specified bit; Set and Reset can flag
transient conditions (such as alarms) or operate as a latched output.
RSTI
Reset Coil Immediate (used with Set Coil Immediate) to reset a specified bit of an
immediate coil. (The bit is then immediately updated.) Set/Reset Immediate can
flag transient conditions (such as alarms) or operate as a latched output.
RSTPKS
RTN
RUN
RUNALL
RUNDIA
Glossary
13
RUNG SIN(X)
RUNG
Inserts an empty rung in your ladder program when in ladder editor insert mode.
S
SBR
SCALE
SDT
Sequential Data Table writes the value at an indexed table location to the
specified output address. The index is incremented to the next table entry each
time the statement is executed. The restart bit is set when the index is at any
point other than the beginning of the table. (Available in SF programs and SF
subroutines.)
SEEK
SELECT
Allows the selection of ladder rung and charts to be displayed in status; selects a
program or file in multiple programs (PGMS).
Sends the print control sequence to the printer.
SEND
SET
Set Coil (used with Reset Coil) to set a specified bit; Set and Reset can flag
transient conditions (such as alarms) or operate as a latched output.
SETI
Set Coil Immediate (used with Reset Coil Immediate) to set a specified bit of an
immediate coil. (The bit is then immediately updated.) Set/Reset Immediate can
flag transient conditions (such as alarms) or operate as a latched output.
SETPSW
SETUP
Invokes print menu for setting up print parameters. Also selects a prompt for
selecting import/export parameters.
Special Function Error Code, an element used in SF programming; must be an
integer.
SFEC
SFPGM
SFPGM Header
Special Function Program Header is used to define program title, type, behavior
of SF program when an error occurs.
SFSUB
SFSUB Header
SHOW
SHR
SHRB
Bit Shift Register creates a bit shift register in the Discrete Image Register.
SHRW
Word Shift Register shifts words from memory location A to the V-memory,
beginning at location B. The number of words to be shifted to create the shift
register is specified in N.
SIN(X)
14
Glossary
SKP SUSPEND
SKP
Skip skips execution of a section of ladder logic to the corresponding label; (see
also LBL).
SMC
SOAK
Soft Key
Is a function key labeled from F1 to F8, its action depends on the menu displayed
on the screen.
Spacebar
Toggles between function key menus when a plus (+) appears to the right of the
function key line; also inputs a space in text.
SPETn
Provides for each SF subroutine a peak elapsed time that is the time from the SF
subroutine being scheduled until the process completes execution (n = 11023).
SQRT
Square Root takes the square root of a positive integer and stores the result in
the B location of memory. The integer retains its original value.
SQRT(X)
SRCTGL
S.SCAN
Single Scan initiates a single scan of the ladder program or configures the task
scan table.
SSI
SSR
Sequential Shift Register shifts data in a register one location each time the
statement is executed. Vacated locations are set to 0. Data shifted out of the
register is lost. The status bit is set when all locations in the register have been
set to 0.
START
Starts the verify operation in AUX 17; in Replace, it starts the search and replace
operation; in Single Scan (Status), it starts the single scan function.
STATUS
STFE
Search Table For Equal locates the next occurrence of the word in a table that is
equal to the source word.
STFN
Search Table For Not Equal locates the next occurrence of the word in a table
that is not equal to the source word.
STMTNO
STOP
STOPOE
STRING
STW
SUB
SUSPEND
Glossary
15
SWAP TMRS
SWAP
SWITCH
Swaps the active and standby roles of CPU units in a hot backup system
(AUX 82).
SWPRBC
Swaps the active and standby roles of dual media RBCs on the selected base.
SYN
SYNC
SYNTAX
Validates RLL instructions and displays errors found. Not all controllers support
this function.
SYNTGL
Synonym Toggle toggles display of synonyms on or off for displayed ladder rungs
or I/O points. In both on-line and off-line modes, the information is obtained from
the currently selected program on the disk when synonym display is on. In the
replace table, it toggles the copying of synonyms.
Tab
TAND
Table to Table AND ANDs the corresponding bits in two tables and places the
results in a third specified table.
TAN(X)
TASK
RLL Task box allows you to divide the RLL program into a normal task
(synchronized with the I/O update) and a cyclic task (executed on a
timed-interrupt basis, asynchronous to the I/O update).
TC
Timer or Counter selects timer, counter, and other related box types.
TCC
TCMP
Time Compare compares the time of the real-time clock with the values contained
in designated V-memory locations.
TCP
TCPL
Table Complement inverts the status of each bit in a table and places results in a
second table.
TCW
TEXT
TITLE
Accesses the title function to program or display the title, date, and version of the
program. In AUX, it displays the title; in Block, it selects title data.
TMR
TMRF
TMR1MS
TMR.1S
Timer 0.1-Second is a number format that shows 0.1 second resolution. This
format takes one word (16 bits).
TMRS
16
Glossary
TOR W
TOR
Table to Table OR ORs the corresponding bits in two tables and places results in
a third table.
TPETn
Task Peak Elapsed Time; provides for each task a peak elapsed time defining the
time from scheduling the task until the process completes execution
(n = Task 116).
TRUNC(X)
TSCAN
TSET
Time Set sets the time portion of the real-time clock to the values contained in
designated V-memory locations.
TTOW
TXOR
In the ladder editor, it is a hard key that draws a vertical line up from the top left
edge of the cursor. In SF, U is a suffix that indicates a 16-bit unsigned word (such
as V23U, 427U).
U-memory
Memory type used for storing external subroutines; in 545, 555, and 575
controllers only.
UDC
Up Down Counter counts the number of events that have occurred (up or down)
between 0 and 32767.
UINT
UN.ALL
UNDEL
UNFORC
UNIFY
Moves all modules for the selected slave into the first module.
UNIQUE
UNLCK
UNLOCK
Allows the loop card operating mode to be set differently from the discrete CPU.
UNSCALE
UPDATE
Updates the controller with the PROFIBUS-DP I/O configuration from the
selected program on disk.
VAR
A scan time that takes as long as necessary and not any longer.
VERT
Vertical draws a vertical line to the left and below the cursor in the ladder editor.
VERTD
VMM
A24 VME address space (supervisor and non-supervisory); 575 controllers only.
VMS
Glossary
17
WAND WY
WAND
WDBTGL
WIO
WOR
In ladders, a box instruction that logically ORs a word in memory location A with
a word in memory location B. The result is placed in memory location C. The
words located in memory locations A and B are not affected by the WOR
instruction and retain their original values. [In SF, replaced by |]
WRCHT
WRITDK
Write Disk sends the displayed memory configuration, or I/O Module Definition,
to the current program; it then reads back what it sent and displays it on the
screen. In print, it writes set up or selection parameters to disk. After editing, it
saves off-line modifications made to the program in RAM to the currently selected
program on disk.
WRITE
Saves the changes on the screen when in V/K memory editor. In R/S editor, it
saves the modified table. In AUX 14, saves Watchdog timeout value; in AUX 16,
saves Task Code values; in AUX 18, saves modified time of day; in AUX 19, saves
controller scan time values.
WRITPC
Write PLC sends the displayed I/O Module Definition for the selected base or
memory configuration to the controller. It then reads back what it sent and
displays it on the screen. Available on-line only.
WRITRM
Write RAM sends the displayed memory configuration or I/O Module Definition to
the programming device RAM. It then reads back what it sent and displays it on
the screen. Available off-line only.
WROT
WRTBL
WTOT
Word to Table places a duplicate of a word in the destination table at the address
specified.
WTTA
Word to Table AND compares each bit in a source word to corresponding bit of a
designated word in a table and places results in a destination table.
WTTO
Word to Table OR ORs the corresponding bits of a word with a designated word in
a source table.
WTTXO
WX
WXOR
WY
18
Glossary
X YES
X
X<>WX
Toggles the image register type for the selected module between discrete and
word inputs.
XSUB
Represents a discrete (ON or OFF, open or closed) output device; also a Yes
response.
Y<>WY
Toggles the image register type for the selected module between discrete and
word outputs.
YES
Glossary
19
Symbols
| |
|/ |
|R|( I )
( )
( / )
Indicates that more function keys are accessible on a display by pressing the
spacebar; also the addition/unary plus operator in SF IMATH, MATH, IF, and IIF
statements. Also designates a positive constant in RLL, e.g., +32767.
+/
Is a signed decimal integer with the range of +32767 to 32768. This format takes
one word (16 bits).
:=
<
<=
<>
>
>=
>>
<<
( )
(: :)
**
Indirect address indicator, e.g., @V100 refers to the address stored within V100.
Specifies bit-of-word and DCP (Drum Step) elements in RLL. For example:
WY23.16 specifies bit 16 of WY23, and DCP10.3 specifies step 3 of Drum 10.
In SF, specifies a real address or real number (for example V23. or 2.74).
&
20
Glossary
Glossary
21
Key
Comment
Abort
ESC
AUX
BOX
Coils
Y
C
WY
V
G
W
Contacts
X
Y
C
WX/WY
V
K
G
W
Contact/Coil Toggle
Cursor Position Display
Decrement
Address
Delete Character
Enable/Disable
END
Ctrl T
F10
DEL
Backspace
END
ENTER
ENTER
Equal to
EXIT
ESC
FIND
Ctrl F
>
? or \
HOME
HORZ
Glossary
Alt H
HOME
22
Key
Comment
HORZD
Immediate I/O
Increment Address
F9
Insert Character
INS
Insert Mode
INSERT
K-Memory Editor
L-Memory Address
Less Than
Macro Functions
INS
Inserts a column
INS
Inserts a row
Ctrl K
L
<
Alt R
Record macro
Alt S
Stop macro
Alt P
Play macro
Alt L
Alt W
Alt O
NO
Not Equal to
Off-Line Password
Output
Page Up
PgUp
Page Down
PgDn
Page Left
Ctrl
Page Right
Ctrl
Pop-Up Synonyms
Print Screen
Ctrl L
Edits synonym/descriptor
Ctrl PrtSc
PrtSc
Quick SF Edit
Ctrl O
Go to SF to show or edit
Alt Q
Single Scan
Status
Usage Table
Ctrl U
V-Memory Editor
Ctrl V
VERT
Creates Up line
VERTD
Ctrl X
Y
Glossary
23
Index
A
Address
ethernet for each device, G-5, G-10, G-13
selecting for each device, G-5, G-10, G-13
Addressing TSAPs
multiple-user installations, G-12
single-user, G-8
Alarms, analog
displaying table, 8-12
editing, 8-13
invoking directory, 8-12
Application ID for 575, 2-13, 4-8
Assistance, technical, xxxi
Aux 10, powering up controller, 11-5
Aux 11, partial restart, 11-6
Aux 12, complete restart, 11-6
Aux 13, 3137, 41, 7477, clearing controller
memory, 11-8
Aux 14, 16, 18, setting time functions, 11-10
Aux 15, 20, 23, 27, 28, 29, performing controller
diagnostics, 11-1311-16
Aux 17, comparing controller program to disk,
11-17
Aux 19, setting controller scan time, 11-19
Aux 21, 25, performing I/O diagnostics, 11-21
Aux 22, checking RLL syntax, 11-23
B
Batch programming
alarms, analog, 8-12
creating comments, 8-26
loops, 8-6
ramp/soak operations, 8-10
special function, accessing, 8-20
special functions, entering, 8-24
Index-1
C
Cable
modem pinouts, F-1F-2
requirements, 1-41-5
Charts. See Status chart
Coils, entering, 7-10
Color
accessing, 2-2
configuring, 2-22-3
TISOFT colors, 2-2
COM PROFIBUS, with TISOFT
binary file, 6-4
configuring slaves, 6-4
overview, 6-3
COM5434 Configurator software, installing, J-4
Comment field, 9-4
Comment pop-up, element list, 9-5
Comments
accessing in S-memory, 9-16
adding paging instructions, 9-7
changing, 9-8
creating at program entry (batch), 8-26
displaying in status, 10-12
entering in S-memory, 9-16
finding, 9-8
Index-2
Controller
auxiliary functions, 11-2, 11-3
diagnostics, 11-13
base, 11-21
card failure class, 11-15
PLC operational status, 11-16
RBC part number, 11-14
EEPROMS, programming, 11-29
hot backup status, selecting, 11-27
I/O diagnostics, 11-21
memory types
clearing, 11-8
loading, 11-7
saving, 11-9
operating modes
ladders, 8-28, 10-19, 11-25
loops, 8-29, 10-20, 11-26
selecting hot backup status, 11-27
port lockout, programming, 11-28
powering up, 11-5
program
loading, 11-7
saving, 11-9
verification menu, 11-17
restart, complete, 11-6
restart, partial, 11-6
restart, power up, 11-5
time functions
changing scan time, 11-19
reading/setting date and time, 11-12
setting watchdog timer, 11-10
task codes, setting number per scan, 11-11
Converting programs from earlier releases, xxv,
C-1C-3
CP 5412 (A2) card
configuring, J-3
installing, J-3
CP1413
installing module, G-3
module cabling, G-16
CP1413 card
and COML, G-8
configuring, G-3
Cursor movement, hard keys, 7-7
CVU card. See TIWAY host adapter card
CVU host, invoking TISOFT, 1-10
D
Deleting
lines and elements, 7-15
network, 7-13
Diagnostics
controller, 11-13
I/O bases, 11-21
I/O failed display, 11-22
I/O remote base, 11-21
Directory program selection screen, 2-42-15
Directory selection screen, 2-5
Discrete programming
accessing program entry, 7-3
comment screen, 7-18
documentation editor, 7-18
entering boxes, 7-10
entering coils, 7-10
entering elements, 7-8
on screen cross-reference, 7-24
synonym editor, 7-18
unique elements, 7-16
V/K memory editor, 7-21
Display size, 3-4
Documenting programs
ladder programs, 9-2
accessing function, 9-3
comments
adding paging instructions, 9-7
changing, 9-8
finding, 9-8
invoking menu, 9-6
keying in, 9-7
parameters, 9-6
saving, 9-7
descriptors
entering, 9-12
preparing to enter, 9-9
selecting an element, 9-9
synonyms
entering, 9-12
finding, 9-13
invoking menu, 9-11
keying in, 9-12
modifying, 9-13
parameters, 9-10
pop-up editor, 9-11
preparing to enter, 9-9
selecting an element, 9-9
Index-3
titling, 9-149-15
entering a program, 9-15
invoking display, 9-14
parameters, 9-15
saving, 9-15
S-memory, comments
accessing, 9-16
entering, 9-169-22
keying in, 9-17
parameters, 9-16
saving, 9-17
DOS BACKUP, using, 2-10
DOS RESTORE, using, 2-10
E
Edit
drawing lines for networks, 7-12
entering boxes, 7-10
entering coils, 7-10
entering contacts, 7-9
entering extended rungs, 7-11
entering relational contacts, 7-9
inserting elements, 7-14
inserting rung, 7-13
slave address, 6-11
slave status, 6-11
Edit function, changing values, 10-1410-22
Element usage listing, 7-17
Elements
forcing, 10-17
HELP, 3-10
replacing, 12-2
building a table, 12-612-7
using search and replace table, 12-412-5
status
changing, 10-16
reading, 10-16
unforcing, 10-18
values
changing with force function, 10-17
writing, 10-16
Error messages, B-1B-26
Exporting binary file, from COM PROFIBUS,
6-4
Index-4
F
Files
backing up, 2-10
converting existing, C-1C-3
Find function, using, 7-19
Find I/O point
PROFIBUS-DP, 6-20
Series 505, 5-14
FMS communications
invoking, J-6
overview, J-2
FMS CP (505CP5434FMS) module
configuring, J-4
installing, J-4
FMS network station, selecting, J-7
FMS node list, creating, J-5
FMS task code driver, installing, J-6
Force function
forcing, 10-17
unforcing, 10-18
unforcing all, 10-18
Formatting Diskettes, 2-7
Function HELP, 3-10
Functions, TISOFT
accessing, 3-4
off-line and on-line, 3-5
off-line only, 3-6
on-line only, 3-6
programming and utilities, 3-23-11
G
Global search and replace
accessing, 12-2
building a table, 12-612-7
clearing a table, 12-4
clearing location, 12-4
completing table fields, 12-5
copying comments and synonyms, 12-4
functions, 12-2
invoking menu, 12-2
invoking table display, 12-4
prompt fields, 12-3
replacing elements, 12-3
replacing elements using a table, 12-4
H
H1 communications
accessing devices, G-20
addresses, G-8, G-12
cabling, G-16
configuring network, G-5
memory manager, G-5
selecting network node names, G-22
troubleshooting, G-23
with TISOFT, G-2
Hard keys for common functions, 3-7
HELP screen, accessing, 3-10
HELP system, types of help, 3-103-11
Hints, 1-11
Host adapter
configuring Unilink, E-7
selecting secondary, E-6
TIWAY 1 and Unilink, E-2
TIWAY card, E-2
using TIWAY 1 to select secondary, E-4
using Unilink, E-5
Hot key HELP, 3-10
Hotline, for technical assistance, xxxi
L
Ladder and charts, displaying both, 10-21
Ladder display, using, 3-4
Ladder programs
accessing block operations, 13-4
accessing documentation functions, 9-3
available documentation, 9-2
block copy, 13-3
block delete, 13-3
block move, 13-3
block put, 13-3
changing, 7-137-15
cross-reference
accessing on screen, 7-24
parameters, 7-24
reading display, 7-24
using on screen, 7-247-26
documenting, 9-2
editing, 7-3, 7-87-15
entering, 7-3, 7-87-15
entering block parameters, 13-5
making entries to block menus, 13-5
placing box instructions, 7-10
unique elements, 7-16
Ladder status, displaying synonyms and
comments, 10-12
List display
elements, 3-11, 7-2
finding elements, 7-20
SF programming, 8-22
Inserting
elements, 7-14
rungs, 7-13
Loop table
displaying, 8-6, 8-8
editing, 8-88-9
making entries, 8-8
Installation
CP1413 card, G-3
CP1413 module, G-3
Installing
TISOFT, 1-6
upgrade software, 1-6
Invoking TISOFT, 1-10
K
Keystroke macros, 7-26
M
Macros, keystrokes, 7-26
Managing program files, 2-42-9
Manuals, related, xxxi
Memory
configuration. See Configuration, memory
system memory requirements, 1-2
Memory availability (Aux 28), 11-16
Index-5
N
Node list, creating FMS network lists, J-5
O
O.S. options, selecting, 1-10
Off-line functions, 3-53-6
Off-line operation, selecting, 2-11
On-line password, operations, H-8
Print function
available functions, 14-2
cross-reference contents, 14-8
cross-reference options, 14-8
entering selections, 14-4, 14-5
invoking selection menu, 14-4
parameters, 14-9
print cross-reference, 14-8
print menus, accessing, 14-4
printing screen display, 14-3
setup menu, 14-6
PROFIBUSFMS communications. See FMS
communications
Program file management, 2-42-9
Program files
copying, 2-9
creating a new directory, 2-6
creating a new program name, 2-7
deleting, 2-8
removing a directory, 2-6
renaming, 2-8
selecting a directory, 2-7
selecting a drive, 2-6
selecting a program, 2-8
Program selection screen, 2-4, 2-5
Programming
discrete, 7-27-26
ladder program elements, 7-2
using TISOFT menus, 7-3
P
Password operations, on-line, H-8
Pinouts
modem, F-1
RS-232-C ports, 1-4
RS-422 ports, 1-5
PLC card failure class (Aux 27), 11-15
PLC operational status (Aux 29), 11-16
Port configuration for 575
reading port, 2-14
writing port, 2-15
Index-6
R
Ramp/soak table
entering, 8-108-11
entering address, 8-11
making entries, 8-11
RBC software part number (Aux 23), 11-14
Related manuals, xxxi
Relational contacts, entering, 7-9
Replace. See Global search and replace
RS-422 pinouts, cable, 1-5
RS-232-C pinouts, cable, 1-4
Run-time editing, 7-47-5
S
S-memory
accessing block operations, 13-7
block functions
block copy, 13-6
block delete, 13-6
block move, 13-6
block put, 13-6
comments, 13-6
control blocks
determining compiled status, 8-32
determining status, 8-30
disabling, 8-30
enabling, 8-30
status during edits, 8-9, 8-13, 8-23
designating blocks, 13-7
directories
function keys, 8-4
information, 8-3
locating entries, 8-5
using TISOFT menus, 8-2
entering block parameters, 13-8
functions, accessing, 8-2
S7-5412/MS-DOS, Windows software, for FMS
communications, J-3
Scan time, setting, 11-19
Search and replace. See Global search and
replace
Selecting, an element for comment, 9-9
Selection table
loading, 10-22
saving, 10-22
SF programming
compiled mode, 8-31
elements, 8-14
entering, header, 8-24
instructions, 8-14, 8-168-19
invoking directory, 8-20
language, 8-14
ordering expressions, 8-15
parameters, 8-168-19
programs
editing, 8-228-25
entering, 8-248-25
statements, 8-24
subroutines
displaying, 8-208-21
editing, 8-228-25
Index-7
Synonyms, continued
entering, 9-9, 9-12
exporting, 9-20
finding, 9-13
importing, 9-22
importing and exporting, 9-18, 9-20, 9-22
in global search and replace, 12-4
invoking editor, 8-26
invoking menu, 9-11
modifying, 9-13
parameters, 9-10
pop-up editor, 7-18, 9-11
selecting, 9-9
T
TCP/IP communications
assigning an IP address, I-3
building a host table file, I-8
connecting to Ethernet, I-5, I-6
installing PC/TCP Kernel software, I-6
installing the TCP/IP module, I-3
overview, I-2
troubleshooting, I-10I-11, J-8
using PLC Start option, I-4
with TISOFT, I-9
TIWAY
host adapter card, E-2
invoking TISOFT, 1-10
selecting secondary, E-6
on-line, E-2
TIWAY I, host adapter card, selecting
secondary, E-4
TSAP
addressing for multiple-user installations,
G-12
addressing in single-user installation, G-8
U
Undelete
duplicating restored element, 7-15
restoring deleted element, 7-15
Unilink host adapter
changing configuration, E-6
configuring, E-5, E-7
selecting secondary address, E-4, E-6
Unique, checking elements, 7-16
Upgrade programming software, installing, 1-6
Usage, element listing, 7-17
Index-8
V
V/K memory table
accessing, 7-21
changing numeric format, 7-23
changing values, 7-22
displaying synonyms, 7-21
displaying values, 7-21
reading/altering contents, 7-21
saving numeric display format, 7-22
using Read function, 7-21
W
Windows 95 installation, 1-71-9
Z
Zoom, to display/edit SF programs, 7-25
Customer Response
We would like to know what you think about our user manuals so that we can serve you better.
How would you rate the quality of our manuals?
Excellent
Good
Fair
Poor
Accuracy
Organization
Clarity
Completeness
Graphics
Examples
Overall design
Size
Index
Would you be interested in giving us more detailed comments about our manuals?
Your Name:
Title:
Telephone Number:
Company Name:
Company Address:
Manual Name:
25905760007
PPX:TS505-8101-7
Edition:
Date:
Seventh
04/98
FOLD
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
PERMIT NO.3
JOHNSON CITY, TN
FOLD